owner’s manual (unlinked) - honda · 2008 pilot owner’s manual (unlinked) this document does...

2008 Pilot

Owner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.© 2007 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-S9V-6502

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Pilot. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33S9VC50

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０７／０５／０９　１１：１２：１３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０００１　

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staffis specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

０７／０５／０９　１１：１２：１８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０００２　

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

０７／０５／０９　１１：１２：２２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０００３　

－

－－

－

－－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

on the vehicle.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１２：３３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０００４　

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of

control or an accident.

Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

204230Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iv

０７／０５／０９　１１：１２：３７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０００５　

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)

(climate control, audio, steering wheel, rear entertainment, security, cruise control, and HomeLink)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 4

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

..........................................Instruments and Controls . 59

....Features . 105

.......................................................................Before Driving . 187

.........................................................................................Driving . 203

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 307

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 311

.................................................Maintenance . 235

.........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 271

..............................................Technical Information . 291

IND

EX

1

０７／０５／０９　１１：１２：４６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０００６　

2

０７／０５／０９　１１：１２：４８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０００７　

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other convenience

features.A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints. The maintenance minder shows you

when you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Technical Information

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

Maintenance

Driving

Before Driving

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

3

０７／０５／０９　１１：１３：０４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０００８　

＊

＊

If equipped.:


4

GAUGES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL REAR A/C CONTROL

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG(P. 11, 28)

REAR VIEW MIRROR WITHCOMPASS

(P. 70)

(P. 82)

(P. 93)

(P. 94)

(P. 97) (P. 113)

Vehicle with rear entertainment system is shown.

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS(P. 61)

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

SHIFT LEVER

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET(P. 101)

HEATING/COOLINGSYSTEMCLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM(P. 115)

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG

(P. 106)

GLOVE BOX(P. 99)

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCH

(P. 11, 35)

(P. 190)

(P. 189)

(P. 206) (P. 179)

０７／０５／０９　１１：１３：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０００９　

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊＊

If equipped.To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.

2 :1 :


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

5

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

(P. 96)

(P. 102)

(P. 75)

(P. 35)

(P. 77)

(P. 74)(P. 78)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

CRUISE CONTROLMASTER BUTTON

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON(P. 77)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFFSWITCH

(P. 177)

(P. 140) (P. 177)

(P. 210)

MOONROOF BUTTONS HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS HORN

VTM-4 LOCK

(P. 219)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

2 2 1

2

2

０７／０５／０９　１１：１３：１９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１０　

6

０７／０５／０９　１１：１３：２２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１１　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 11

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 156. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 21

..Seat Belt System Components . 21

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 23...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23

Additional Information About..........................Your Airbags . 25

......Airbag System Components . 25How Your Front Airbags

....................................Work . 28......................Advanced Airbags . 30

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 31How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 33..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 34

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 35

.............................Airbag Service . 36...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 38

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 38

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 39

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 41

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 41

...Additional Safety Precautions . 42Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 43.......................Protecting Infants . 43

.........Protecting Small Children . 44.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 51...........Protecting Larger Children . 53

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 53..................Using a Booster Seat . 54

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 55

...Additional Safety Precautions . 56.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

...................................Safety Labels . 58

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

０７／０５／０９　１１：１３：２６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１２　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

15

38 56

237

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

8

０７／０５／０９　１１：１３：３５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１３　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

(7)(10)

(9) (3) (1) (4)

(2)(6)(10)

(7) (8)(5)

(2)

(11)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(9) Door Locks(10) Side Airbags(11) Side Curtain Airbags

０７／０５／０９　１１：１３：４２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１４　

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Seat Belts


Why Wear Seat Belts

What you should do:

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１３：５２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１５　

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact or rollover (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

28

31

33

CONTINUED


AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

11

０７／０５／０９　１１：１３：５９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１６　

－See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front seat.

38 56

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features, Protecting Adults and Teens

Protecting Adults and Teens

IntroductionAirbags do not replace seat belts.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

12

０７／０５／０９　１１：１４：０７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１７　

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down (seepage ).

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed and locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doorand tailgate open monitor works.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate monitor on the

instrument panel to indicate when aspecific door or the tailgate is nottightly closed.

78

6682

CONTINUED


Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors 2.1.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

０７／０５／０９　１１：１４：１６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１８　

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

See page for how to adjust theseats.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

87

87


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１４：２４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００１９　

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

The center seating position in thesecond row and all third row seatshave a detachable seat belt that canbe unlatched and retracted into theceiling to allow the seats to be foldeddown. See page for how tounlatch and relatch a belt.

Detachable seat belts shouldnormally be latched whenever theseat-backs are in an upright position.See page for how to unlatch a belt,and page for how to relatch a belt.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

91

1718

17

CONTINUED

Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

4. 5.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness, and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１４：３３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２０　

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.


16

RELEASEBUTTONS

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１４：３９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２１　

CONTINUED

For the third row outer positions,slide out the outer shoulder beltfrom the clip and pull the belt out toextend it.

Pull out the anchor latch and thelatch plate from each holding slot inthe ceiling, and pull out the seat beltto extend it.

Insert the hook at the end of theanchor latch into the anchor buckleby lining up the triangle marks onthe anchor latch and buckle. Make

sure the belt is not twisted. Push theanchor latch until it locks. Thenfollow the procedure for fasteningand positioning an ordinary seat belt(see page ).15


Using the Lap/Shoulder BeltD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

17

LATCH PLATE

ANCHOR LATCH

ANCHOR BUCKLE

ANCHOR LATCH

TRIANGLEMARKS

THIRD ROW OUTER POSITION

SECOND AND THIRD ROW CENTERPOSITION

CLIP

LATCH PLATE

ANCHOR LATCH

Using a seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１４：４７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２２　

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

To unlatch the detachable seat beltanchor before folding down the seat-back, insert your ignition key intothe slot on the side of the anchorbuckle and allow the seat belt toretract. For the center seatingpositions, place the latch plate andanchor latch into their holding slotsin the ceiling. For the third row outerseating positions, re-fasten the beltwith the clip.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

21


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

18

ANCHOR LATCH

ANCHOR BUCKLE

０７／０５／０９　１１：１４：５５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２３　

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１５：０２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２４　

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.


Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.


20

０７／０５／０９　１１：１５：１０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２５　

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any objects, such as a folded-downback seat, that are touching therear of the seat-back.

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all eight seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. If

your seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

3130

Seat Belt System Components

Seat Belt Reminder

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

０７／０５／０９　１１：１５：２０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２６　

The lap/shoulder belt in the centerseat of the second and third rowseats is equipped with a detachableanchor that has two parts: a smalllatch plate and a buckle.

The detachable anchor shouldnormally be latched whenever theseats-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable anchor (see page ).

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

15

17

49


Lap/Shoulder Belt

22

０７／０５／０９　１１：１５：２８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２７　

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

260

CONTINUED

do not deploy

HondaWarranty Information


Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt MaintenanceD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

０７／０５／０９　１１：１５：３７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２８　

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.


24

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１５：４２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００２９　

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System ComponentsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

25

(2)(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(8) (10)(8)

(7)

(9)

(9)

(11)

(5)

(4)

(12)

(13)

(1)

(14)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Position Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(11) Occupant Position Detection System

(OPDS) Sensors(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/

OPDS Sensors Control Unit

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(13) Rollover Sensor(14) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Indicator

０７／０５／０９　１１：１５：４９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３０　

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Your Airbag System includes:

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

28

31

33


26

(15) Rear Safing Sensor(16) Side Impact Sensor (second)(17) Side Curtain Airbags (17)

(16)

(15)

０７／０５／０９　１１：１５：５５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３１　

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,side impact, or if your vehicle isabout to rollover.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

A rollover sensor that can detect ifyour vehicle is about to roll overand signal the control unit todeploy both side curtain airbagsand front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

23

33

34

3330

35

34

21

30


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

０７／０５／０９　１１：１６：０５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３２　

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

35

How Your Front Airbags Work


28

０７／０５／０９　１１：１６：１３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３３　

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. If the occupant’s belt is , the

airbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

CONTINUED

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

latched


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

０７／０５／０９　１１：１６：２１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３４　

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Second-row passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Advanced Airbags


30

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

０７／０５／０９　１１：１６：３０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３５　

CONTINUED

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the affected side.

A second-row passenger pushingor pulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Also, make sure the floor matbehind the front passenger’s seatis properly positioned on the floor(see page ). If it is not, the matmay interfere with the properoperation of the front passenger’sseat and its sensors.

35

260

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

０７／０５／０９　１１：１６：３８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３６　

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

35Side Airbag Cutoff System


32

０７／０５／０９　１１：１６：４５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３７　

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners (see page ).

The airbag on the passenger’s sidewill deploy, and the seat belttensioner will activate, even if thereare no passengers on that side of thevehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the rollover sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over, it signalsthe control unit, which immediatelydeploys both side curtain airbags andactivates both front seat belttensioners.

23

CONTINUED

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０７／０５／０９　１１：１６：５５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３８　

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

63


not

How the SideAirbag OffIndicator Works

34

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１７：０４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００３９　

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected in the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

CONTINUED


How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

2WD4WD

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

2WD4WD

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. models Canadian models

０７／０５／０９　１１：１７：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４０　

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any object, such as a folded-downback seat, that is touching the rearof the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Your airbag system is virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.


Airbag Service An airbag ever inflates.

36

０７／０５／０９　１１：１７：２０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４１　

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during a crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.


Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Additional Safety PrecautionsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

０７／０５／０９　１１：１７：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４２　

－

－－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children age 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every U.S. stateand Canadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

43 5253 56

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

38

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１７：３５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４３　

－

CONTINUED

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collisions. To do thisthe passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

35

53


Small Children

Larger Children

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

０７／０５／０９　１１：１７：４６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４４　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard (onU.S. models, the dashboard label isremoved by the owner) and on thefront visors. Please read and followthe instructions on these labels.


U.S. Models

Canadian Models

40

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

０７／０５／０９　１１：１７：５７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４５　

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Your vehicle has two rows of backseats where children can be properlyrestrained. If you ever have to carrya group of children, and a child mustride in front:

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in a back seat. The back seatis far safer for a child than thefront.

53

18

18

13


If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

０７／０５／０９　１１：１８：０５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４６　

－

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.


For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

83

49 50

Additional Safety Precautions


Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

42

０７／０５／０９　１１：１８：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４７　

CONTINUED

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

When properly installed in thesecond row, a rear-facing child seatmay prevent the driver or a frontpassenger from moving their seat asfar back as recommended, or fromlocking their seat-back in the desiredposition.

It can also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

０７／０５／０９　１１：１８：２２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４８　

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

44

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１８：３０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００４９　

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outersecond row seats.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

35

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１８：３９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５０　

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2. 3.

Installing a Child Seat

46

０７／０５／０９　１１：１８：４５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５１　

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer second rowseats. The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED


Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

LOWERANCHORS

BUTTON

Rigid-type

０７／０５／０９　１１：１８：５４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５２　

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

4.

5.

6.

7.

91


48

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

Flexible-type

０７／０５／０９　１１：１９：０１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５３　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

If you intend to install a child seat inthe center seating position of thesecond row or in the third row, makesure the detachable seat belt issecurely latched (see page ).

1. 2.

3.

17

CONTINUED


Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

０７／０５／０９　１１：１９：０９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５４　

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

4. 5.


50

０７／０５／０９　１１：１９：１５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５５　

Each second row seat has a tetheranchorage point behind the seat-back.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe second or third row seats.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

1.49

CONTINUED


Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Second Row InstallationD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

０７／０５／０９　１１：１９：２２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５６　

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the tetherstrap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Each third row seat has a tetheranchorage point on the tailgate sill.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Slide the anchor cover open asshown, then attach the tetherstrap hook to the anchor, makingsure the strap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of the secondrow seat installation.

2.

2.

1.

3.

49


Third Row Installation

52

０７／０５／０９　１１：１９：３０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５７　

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt FitD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０７／０５／０９　１１：１９：３７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５８　

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

4.

5.

3.

45

Using a Booster Seat


54

０７／０５／０９　１１：１９：４５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００５９　

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

5316

CONTINUED


Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55

０７／０５／０９　１１：１９：５４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６０　

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.


Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.Do not let a child wear a seat belt

across the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions

56

０７／０５／０９　１１：２０：０１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６１　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

57

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２０：１０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６２　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

Canadian models

U.S. models

U.S. models onlyU.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

58

RADIATOR CAP

HOOD

DASHBOARD

DOORJAMBS

SUN VISORS

０７／０５／０９　１１：２０：３１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６３　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62.............................................Gauges . 70

...................................Trip Meter . 70.....................................Odometer . 70

..................................Fuel Gauge . 70...................Temperature Gauge . 71

Outside Temperature...................................Indicator . 71

..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 72Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 73.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 74

.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 75Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 76............Daytime Running Lights . 76

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76.................Hazard Warning Button . 77.................Rear Window Defogger . 77

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 78...............................Keys and Locks . 79

........................Immobilizer System . 80................................Ignition Switch . 81

......................................Door Locks . 82......................Power Door Locks . 82

........................................Tailgate . 82..................Childproof Door Locks . 83

.......................Remote Transmitter . 83....................................Seat Heaters . 86

.................................................Seats . 87..........................Head Restraints . 91

.............................................Mirrors . 92..............................Power Windows . 94

.........................................Moonroof . 96.................................Parking Brake . 97

...........Interior Convenience Items . 98.......................Beverage Holders . 99

...............Console Compartment . 99....................................Glove Box . 99

....................Sunglasses Holder . 100................Conversation Mirror . 100

...................................Sun Visor . 101............................Vanity Mirror . 101

........Accessory Power Sockets . 101...............................Interior Lights . 102

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

０７／０５／０９　１１：２０：３５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６４　

＊

＊ If equipped.

Control Locations

60

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

GAUGES(P.70)

(P.82)

(P.93)

(P.94)

(P.97)

REAR VIEW MIRROR WITHCOMPASS

(P.115)

(P.106)

:

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

HEATING/COOLINGSYSTEM

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS(P.61)

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET(P.101)(P.113)

REAR A/C CONTROL

SHIFT LEVER

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCH

(P.179)(P.206)

(P.190)

(P.189)

０７／０５／０９　１１：２０：４２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６５　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equipped.The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

:

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR(P.69)

(P.69)

(P.69)

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

(P.67)

(P.68)

(P.64)

VTM-4 INDICATOR (P.68)

FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR(P.68)

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.64)

(P.67)

(P.65)(P.66)

(P.65)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR (P.64)

(P.67)

PARKING BRAKEAND BRAKESYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

BRAKE LAMPINDICATOR (P.66)

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

(P.65)

TIRE PRESSUREMONITORING SYSTEM(TPMS) INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR

(P.34, 63)

(P.33, 63)

DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN MONITORTIRE PRESSURE MONITOR

(P.63)

(P.21, 62)

(P.62, 283)

(P.62, 282) (P.62, 282)

(P.63, 284)

０７／０５／０９　１１：２０：５２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６６　

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. See page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals.

21

283

282

282

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

62

０７／０５／０９　１１：２１：０１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６７　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis on, your vehicle still has normalbraking ability but no anti-lockbrakes. For more information, seepage .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagcutoff system, side curtain airbags,automatic seat belt tensioners,driver’s seat position sensor, or thefront passenger’s weight sensors.For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

34

33

284

217


Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag OffIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

U.S. Canada

U.S. Canada

０７／０５／０９　１１：２１：１１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６８　

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willthen go off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink, and the enginewill not start (see page ).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

1.

2.

3.

80

218

218

218


VSA Activation IndicatorVehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

64

０７／０５／０９　１１：２１：２１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００６９　


If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator and the tirepressure monitor will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.


If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure on the tirepressure monitor, and determine thecause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). Refer to page

for more information.

The appropriate tire indicator willcome on along with the low tirepressure indicator if a tire issignificantly underinflated or hassuddenly lost pressure. See

for what todo if this indicator comes on.

211

272

285

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitor

LowTire Pressure Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

０７／０５／０９　１１：２１：３０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７０　

If a brake light does not work, theindicator comes on

when you push the brake pedal withthe ignition switch in the ON (II)position.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

The appropriate indicator comes onin this display if the tailgate or anydoor is not closed tightly.

All of the indicators in the monitordisplay come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Replace the bulb assoon as possible (see page ).

255 258

258

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Brake Lamp Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Monitor


66

BRAKE LAMP

０７／０５／０９　１１：２１：３８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７１　

Canadian models only



This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position with the headlightswitch off and the parking brake set.It should go off when you turn on theheadlights or release the parkingbrake. If it comes on at any othertime, it means there is a problemwith the DRL. There may also be aproblem with the high beamheadlights.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicator(see page ).

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 1.8 U.S. gal (7.0 ) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.

75

76

177249

High Beam IndicatorDaytime Running LightsIndicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

０７／０５／０９　１１：２１：５０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７２　

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. It should come onfor a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it means the transmission fluidtemperature is too high. Pull to theside of the road when it is safe, shiftto Park, and let the engine idle untilthe indicator goes out.

If the indicator blinks while driving,the VTM-4 fluid temperature is toohigh. Pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, shift to Park, and letthe engine idle until the indicatorgoes out.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem in the 4WDsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have it checked.

While the engine is operating in itsmost economical range, thisindicator may come on and stay on.

4WD models only 4WD models only 2WD models only

A/T TemperatureIndicator

VTM-4 Indicator Fuel Economy Indicator


68

Continuing to drive with the A/Ttemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

Continuing to drive with the VTM-4indicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２２：００　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７３　

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

75

237

On EX, EX-L, and EX-SEmodels


Lights On Indicator Fog Light Indicator Maintenance MinderIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

０７／０５／０９　１１：２２：０８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７４　

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the outside temperaturedisplay (except LX, LX-VP models)by pressing the select/reset knobrepeatedly.

This shows the total distance yourvehicle has been driven. It measuresmiles in U.S. models and kilometersin Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

Trip Meter

Odometer

Fuel Gauge

Gauges

70

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TRIP METER

INFORMATION DISPLAY

ODOMETER

SELECT/RESETKNOB

U.S. model is shown

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２２：１８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７５　

± ±

－－－－－－－－

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle white mark. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper white mark. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theselect/reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

Select the outside temperatureindicator, then press the select/resetknob for 10 seconds. The followingsequence will appear for 1 secondeach: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2,1, 0 (Canada).

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the select/reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

248

On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE modelsTemperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

０７／０５／０９　１１：２２：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７６　

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the select/reset knob.

The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messagewill appear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

If the system still detects a leak inthe vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .283

237

Gauges

Maintenance Minder DisplayCheck Fuel Cap Message

72

０７／０５／０９　１１：２２：３３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７７　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊ If equipped.

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.1 :2 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

(P.96)

(P.102)

CRUISE CONTROLMASTER BUTTON

(P.78)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P.77)

(P.35)

(P.77)

(P.74)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

(P.75)

(P.177)

(P.140)

(P.177)

(P.210)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

MOONROOF BUTTONS HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS

VTM-4 LOCK

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

(P.219)

HORN2

2

2

2

1

０７／０５／０９　１１：２２：３９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７８　

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

Rotate the switch clockwise toturn the rear window wiper ON.Hold past ON to turn the rearwindow wiper on and to spray therear window washer.OFF

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wiper speedwill increase to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

Rotate the switchcounterclockwise also to spray thewindow washer and turn the wiperon.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

1.

2.

3.4.

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

MIST

LO

OFF

INT

HI

Windshield Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

74

０７／０５／０９　１１：２２：４９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００７９　

－

－

－

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsHeadlightsHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights off (if equipped)Fog lights on (if equipped)

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switchon the left lever to the positionturns on the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the

position turns on theheadlights. If you leave the lights onwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

Push the leverforward until you hear a click. Thehigh beam indicator will come on(see page ). Pull the lever back toreturn to the low beams.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.

67

On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models

Turn Signals and Headlights

Turn Signal

Headlights

High Beams

Fog Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

０７／０５／０９　１１：２２：５８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８０　

The automatic lighting off featureturns off the headlights, all otherexterior lights, and the instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightsgo off. With the driver’s door open,you will hear a lights-on reminderchime.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or

position, remove the key, thenopen and close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the door,the lights will turn off after 10minutes.

The select/reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.

On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE modelsInstrument Panel BrightnessAutomatic Lighting Off Feature

(Canadian Models)Daytime Running Lights

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness

76

SELECT/RESET KNOB

０７／０５／０９　１１：２３：０７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８１　

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove the button comes on to showthe defogger is on. If you do not turnit off, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON LX and LX-VP modelsEX, EX-L, and EX-SE models

０７／０５／０９　１１：２３：１４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８２　

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints to your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

78

LEVER

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２３：２０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８３　

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the glovebox locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart.

Keys and Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

VALET KEY(GRAY)

KEY NUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYS WITHREMOTE TRANSMITTER

０７／０５／０９　１１：２３：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８４　

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourdealer.

Immobilizer System

80

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２３：３５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８５　

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver’s door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

START (III)

ON (II)

Ignition Switch

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

０７／０５／０９　１１：２３：４３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８６　

To lock the doors and the tailgate,press the master door lock switch oneither front door, press the lock tabdown on the driver’s door, or use thekey on the outside lock on the driver’sdoor.

Pressing up on either master doorlock switch will unlock all of thedoors and the tailgate.

The lock tab on any door locks andunlocks that door. To unlock thedriver’s door from the outside, turnthe key and release it. If you turnand hold it, all doors and the tailgateunlock.

Keep the tailgate and the hatch glassclosed at all times while driving toavoid damaging the tailgate and thehatch glass, and to prevent exhaustgas from getting into the interior.See onpage .

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. They arenot disabled if the driver’s door isclosed. Pushing the switch down onthe open passenger’s door will lockall doors and the tailgate. To open the tailgate, pull the handle,

then lift up. To close the tailgate, usethe inner handle to pull it down, thenpress down on the back edge.

57

Power Door Locks Tailgate

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

82

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK TAB

０７／０５／０９　１１：２３：５３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８７　

－

－The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors andthe tailgate. Some exterior lights willflash twice each time you press thebutton.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior and interior lights will flash.When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system hasset. You cannot lock it if any door isnot fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights, depending on the interiorlight control switch position, willcome on (see page ). If you donot open any door, the lights stay onfor about 30 seconds, then go out. Ifyou relock the doors and the tailgatewith the remote transmitter before30 seconds have elapsed, the lightswill go off immediately.

If you do not open any door or thetailgate within 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock, and thesecurity system (if equipped) willreset.

102

CONTINUED

Childproof Door Locks UNLOCK

LOCK

Remote Transmitter

Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

LED

LOCK LEVER

Unlock

Lock

０７／０５／０９　１１：２４：０１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８８　

－

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Battery type: CR1616

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

1.

2.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote Transmitter Care

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

84

SCREW

０７／０５／０９　１１：２４：１１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００８９　

＋

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.

3.

4.

5.




Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

BATTERY

TAB

０７／０５／０９　１１：２４：１８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９０　

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.Push the top of the switch, HI, to

rapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag cutoff system,there is no heater in the passenger’sseat-back. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II) to use the heaters.

If equipped

Seat Heaters

86

SEAT HEATER BUTTONSSEAT HEATER BUTTONS

０７／０５／０９　１１：２４：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９１　

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

13 14On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat-back angle.

The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Moves the seatforward and backward.

Moves the front of theseat up or down andthe rear of the seat upor down.

Raises or lowers theseat.

Seats

Power Seat AdjustmentsInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

０７／０５／０９　１１：２４：３６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９２　

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe front seat cushion. Then try tomove the seat to make sure it islocked into position.

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.


Seats

Manual Seat AdjustmentsDriver’s Lumbar Support

88

０７／０５／０９　１１：２４：４３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９３　

The left and right halves can befolded separately.

If you are folding the left half ofthe seat, use the ignition key torelease the center seat belt fromthe detachable anchor (see page

).

Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

Pull up the handle on the outsideof the seat-back.

Fold the seat-back forward.

To change the angle of the seats inthe second row seat-backs, pull upthe handle on the seat-back. Movingthe short vertical switch forward orbackward adjusts the seat back inthose directions.

To adjust the seats forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion. After moving theseat, make sure it is locked intoposition.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Turn the front dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe front of the seat bottom, and turnthe rear dial to raise the rear.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to its upright position. Makesure the seat is locked and securedbefore driving.

2.

3.

1.

4.

18

On LX and LX-VP models

Seats

Folding the Second Row SeatsAdjusting the Second Row SeatsDriver’s Seat Height AdjustmentInstrum

entsand

Controls

89

SECONDROW SEAT

０７／０５／０９　１１：２４：５４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９４　

Remove the head restraints bypushing the release buttons andpulling the restraints out.

Store the head restraints underthe cargo area floor. Insert thelegs into the holes in the sides ofthe storage compartment.

Pull on the handle on the back of theseat-back, move the seat-back to thedesired position, and release thehandle. Let the seat-back latch in thenew position.

To get into the third row seats, pullup the lever on the side of thepassenger’s side second row seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward,and then can be slid forward.

Push the whole seat backwards untilit fully latches. Make sure the seat islocked and secured before driving.

1.

2.

Seats

Folding the Third Row SeatAdjusting the Third Row SeatThird Seat Access

90

THIRD ROWSEAT HANDLERELEASE LEVER

０７／０５／０９　１１：２５：０３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９５　

Use the ignition key to release theseat belt from the detachableanchor (see page ).

Unlock the seat-back by pullingthe handle. Push the seat-backforward.

Make sure you clip the small latchplate of each outer shoulder belt tothe seat belt webbing whenever thethird seat is folded.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to its upright position.

Reinstall the head restraints,reconnect the seat belts, and makesure the seats are secured beforedriving.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

3.

4.

18

198

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

15

CONTINUED

Seats

Head Restraints

Carrying Cargo

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

０７／０５／０９　１１：２５：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９６　

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

To remove one for cleaning or repair,push the release button, and lift therestraint up.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Seats, Mirrors

Mirrors

92

TABRELEASE BUTTON

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２５：２０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９７　

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

The rear view mirror has a compassfunction to indicate the vehicle’sdirection.Refer to on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.179

If equipped

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Compass

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

SELECTOR SWITCH

０７／０５／０９　１１：２５：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９８　

－ To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

If equipped

AUTO

Power Mirror Heaters Power Windows

Mirrors, Power Windows

94

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２５：３６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　００９９　

－

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function may be disabled. Ifthis happens, the power windowsystem will need to be reset afterreconnecting the battery or installingthe fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger windows cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

1.

2.

Power Windows

AUTO REVERSEInstrum

entsand

Controls

95

０７／０５／０９　１１：２５：４３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１００　

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position.

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button

. To close the moonroof, pressand hold the upper button . Toopen the moonroof, press and holdthe lower button . Release thebutton when the moonroof gets tothe desired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has a key-off delayfunction. You can still open and closethe moonroof for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.The key-off delay function cancels assoon as you open either front door.You must then turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position tooperate the moonroof.

If equipped

Moonroof

96

CLOSE BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

TILT-UPBUTTON

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２５：５１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１０１　

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, push on the pedal again.The parking brake indicator on theinstrument panel should go out whenthe parking brake is fully released(see page ).63

Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２５：５６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１０２　

＊

＊

＊ If equipped.:

Interior Convenience Items

98

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

GLOVE BOX

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

VANITY MIRROR

VANITY MIRROR

SUN VISOR

BEVERAGE HOLDERS ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

SUNGLASS HOLDER WITHCONVERSATION MIRROR

SUN VISOR

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

０７／０５／０９　１１：２６：００　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１０３　

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the rear door pocket beverageholders when you close the reardoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets. Thefront beverage holders can beinstalled under the slide.Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.

Pivot the door of the console forwardand you can store a cellular phone, asmall notepad, and business cards init.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.


Beverage Holders Console Compartment Glove BoxInstrum

entsand

Controls

99

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０７／０５／０９　１１：２６：１０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１０４　

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

The sunglasses holder uses a convexmirror for its bottom panel. You cansee all the vehicle passengers in thismirror. To use the mirror, open thesunglasses holder fully, push it to thefirst detent, and release it.

On EX-L, EX-SE, and Canadian EXmodels


Sunglasses Holder Conversation Mirror

100

Push

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

０７／０５／０９　１１：２６：１７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１０５　

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle. Do not usethe extended sun visor over the rearview mirror.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When both sockets arebeing used, the combined powerrating of the accessories should be120 watts or less (10 amps).

The light comes on when you pull upthe cover.

When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip and swing it out. Slidethe extension out to get morecoverage on the side window.

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror light will not comeon if the sun visor is slid outward.

Each socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

Sun Visor Accessory Power SocketsVanity Mirror


Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

SUN VISOR

EXTENSION

０７／０５／０９　１１：２６：２６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１０６　

Always run the engine when you usethe AC power outlet.

The maximum capacity for thispower outlet is 115 volt AC at 100watts or less. If you use an appliancewhich requires more than 100 watts,it automatically stops supplying thepower. If this happens, turn theignition switch off and turn it onagain.

The AC power outlet is notdesigned for electric applianceswhich require high initial peakwattage such as cathode-ray tubetype televisions, refrigerators,electric pumps, etc. It is also notsuitable for devices that processprecise data such as medicalequipment or measuring instruments.Any appliances that require anextremely stable power supply suchas microcomputer-controlled electricblankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,should not be connected to thisoutlet.

All the individual map lights comeon and stay on as long as theswitch remains in the ON position.

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off withthe switches next to the lights.

None of the lights come on when adoor or the tailgate is opened.

There is a 115 volt AC power outletin the console compartment. To usethe AC power outlet, open theconsole compartment lid and openthe outlet cover. Insert the plug intothe receptacle slightly, turn it 90°clockwise, then push in the plug allthe way.

When this switch is in the ON position:

If equipped

When the switch is in the OFF position:

Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights

AC Power Outlet Light Control Switch

102

NOTE:

DOORACTIVATEDPOSITION OFF

ON

０７／０５／０９　１１：２６：３７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１０７　

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows cannot beturned on.

The courtesy light between the maplights comes on when you turn theparking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the select/resetknob on the instrument panel.

The individual map lights come onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened, or when the remotetransmitter is used to unlock thedoors.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows can beturned on and off by pressing thelens.

The tailgate light comes on whenyou open the tailgate if the lightswitch is in the ON position.

The lights go out about 6 secondsafter all the doors and the tailgateare closed. With any door or thetailgate left open, the lights stayon about 3 minutes, then go out.

The light in the tailgate has an on-offswitch to control if the light comeson when the tailgate is opened.

The courtesy lights in the frontdoors and around the ignition switchcome on when you open any door.After you close the door, the ignitionswitch light stays on for severalseconds.

Turn on the front and rear individualmap lights by pushing the lens ofeach light. Push the lens again toturn it off. You can also operatethese lights with the light controlswitch (see page ).102

When the switch is in the door activatedposition:

Interior Lights

Courtesy LightsIndividual Map Lights

Tailgate Light

Individual Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

０７／０５／０９　１１：２６：４８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１０８　

104

０７／０５／０９　１１：２６：５０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１０９　

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 106......Automatic Climate Control . 112

.........Using the Rear A/C Unit . 113................................Audio System . 115

..........................Playing the Radio . 117............................Radio Reception . 122

.Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 124................................Playing a Disc . 130........................Disc Changer . 131, 134

..................Protecting Your Discs . 135.......Disc Player Error Messages . 138

Disc Changer Error...................................Messages . 139

................Remote Audio Controls . 140.................Radio Theft Protection . 141

..........................Setting the Clock . 142........Rear Entertainment System . 144

............................Security System . 176...............................Cruise Control . 177

.........................................Compass . 179.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 182

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 183

Except for LX models

Features

Features

105

０７／０５／０９　１１：２６：５５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１０　

Vents, Heating, and A/C

106

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

FAN CONTROLDIAL

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

MODE CONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

FAN SPEEDINDICATOR

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIALAUTO BUTTON REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

TEMPERATUREDISPLAY

REAR A/CMANUAL BUTTON

LX and LX-VP MODELS

EX, EX-L, and EX-SE MODELS

０７／０５／０９　１１：２７：０１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１１　

Press the RR A/C MANUAL buttonto adjust the temperature of the rearpassenger compartmentindependently. See page forinformation using the rear A/C unit.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. On LX andLX-VP models, the indicator in thebutton is on when the A/C is on. OnEX, EX-L, and EX-SE models, youwill see A/C ON or A/C OFF in thedisplay.

The temperature setting is shown inthe display.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

Select the fan speed by pressing thefan control buttons ( or ).The fan speed is shown in verticalbars on the display.

Turn the dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Turn thedial counterclockwise to decrease it.

The climate control system can alsobe operated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

On EX, EX-L and EX-SE models, seepage for information onautomatic climate control and semi-automatic operation.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set the dial belowthe outside air temperature.

113

112

On vehicles with navigation system







RR A/C MANUAL Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Temperature Control Dial

Fan Control

Voice Control SystemF

eatures

107

０７／０５／０９　１１：２７：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１２　

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.In this case, you cannot turn the A/Coff.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Use the mode control dial or buttonto select the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

77





Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

Recirculation Button

108

０７／０５／０９　１１：２７：２８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１３　

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected (LX and LX-VP models),or the display shows A/C ON (EX,EX-L, and EX-SE models).Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard. In this mode, you cannotturn off the A/C and also cannotswitch to fresh air mode.

When you switch to from, the A/C stays on, and you

can turn it on and off manually.

When you switch to another mode,the A/C returns to its original setting,either on or off, as displayed by theA/C indicator.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then dischargesit through vents near the tailgate.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.

1.2.3.

5.

71



Using the A/CVentilationMAX A/C

Using the Heater

Features

109

０７／０５／０９　１１：２７：４２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１４　

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator (LX and LX-VPmodels) or the A/C ON indicatorin the display (EX, EX-L, andEX-SE models) will not bedisplayed if it was previously off.Adjust the temperature controldial so the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial to your preference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

The vehicle has two A/Cunits, one is in the front, and theother is in the rear. The LX andLX-VP units are independentlycontrolled. The EX, EX-L, and EX-SEunits are controlled by the frontpanel controls, unless the RR A/CMANUAL button is selected.

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select MAX A/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.1.2.

3.

If the interior is very warm,


To Defog and DefrostTo Dehumidify the Interior


110

NOTE:

０７／０５／０９　１１：２７：５２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１５　

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton until the indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

When you press again or theMODE button, the A/C returns to itsoriginal setting, either on or off, asdisplayed by the A/C ON or A/COFF indicator. If the original settingis A/C OFF, the system switches toAUTO.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator (LX and LX-VPmodels) or the A/C ON indicatorin the display (EX, EX-L, andEX-SE models) will not bedisplayed if it was previously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below it. This willsend more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents.Continuous use of the recirculationmode can cause humidity to build upinside the vehicle. Once thewindshield is clear, select the freshair mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

1.

2.3.




To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Features

111

０７／０５／０９　１１：２８：００　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１６　

－

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL in the display to go out.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Press the AUTO button.Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see FULL AUTO inthe system’s display.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at full coolingor heating only. It does not regulatethe interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

When thesystem is in FULL AUTO, the rearA/C passenger control dial cannotbe used. Pressing the button disablesthe FULL AUTO function.

Turning the fan control dial to theoff position shuts the system off.

If you press OFF, the climate controlsystem shuts off completely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

1.2.

Rear A/C Control




Semi-automatic OperationAutomatic Climate Control

To Turn Everything Off

LoHi


112

０７／０５／０９　１１：２８：１１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１７　

－

－

－

A passenger in the second row canuse the rear fan control dial to adjustthe amount of airflow to the rearpassenger compartment.

Press the RR A/C MANUAL buttonto enable the rear temperaturecontrol dial; a second row passengercan now adjust the temperature inthe rear passenger compartmentwith the rear temperature controldial. OFF (center) The rear A/C unit

shuts off.

Cool Air Turn this dialcounterclockwise to increase theairflow.

Warm Air Turn this dial clockwiseto increase the airflow.

When the RR A/C MANUAL buttonis on, you can adjust the temperatureof the rear passenger compartmentmanually from the second row seat.

When the RR A/C MANUAL buttonis off, the temperature in the rearpassenger compartment is controlledby the front passenger with frontcontrol panel.

CONTINUED

On LX and LX-VP modelsOn LX and LX-VP models


On EX, EX-L, and EX-SE modelsUsing the Rear A/C Unit


Features

113

COOL AIR WARM AIR

REAR A/C MANUAL BUTTON

０７／０５／０９　１１：２８：２０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１８　

－

－

－The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

OFF (center) The rear A/C unitshuts off.

Warm Air Turn this dial clockwiseto increase the temperature.

Cool Air Turn this dialcounterclockwise to decrease thetemperature.


Sunlight and TemperatureSensors


114

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

COOL AIR WARM AIR

０７／０５／０９　１１：２８：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１１９　

Some models may have one of theaudio systems described in thissection.Read the appropriate pages in thissection for operation of the audiosystems installed in your models.

See page to for playing theRadio.

See page to for playing aDisc.

See page to for playing theXM Satellite Radio.

121117

129124

139130

CONTINUED

Only U.S. LX-VP, EX-L, and EX-SEmodels

Audio System

Features

115

AM/FM/CD Audio System

AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System

(EX models)On U.S. models On U.S. models

(EX-L models)On Canadian models

(LX models)

(LX-VP and EX-L models)

On Canadian models

０７／０５／０９　１１：２８：３８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２０　

Audio System

116

On U.S. models

(EX-L models)On Canadian models

AM/FM/CD Changer Audio Systemwith rear entertainment system

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System with navigation system

(EX-L models)

(EX-L and EX-SE models) (EX and EX-L models)

０７／０５／０９　１１：２８：４７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２１　

Playing the Radio

Features

117

PRESET BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE/MODE KNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

AM BUTTONFM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

AM BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

Canadianmodels

AM/FMBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SOUND KNOB

FM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOBU.S. models

(Canadian LX models)

AM/FMBUTTON

U.S. EX model is shown

(U.S. LX-VP, EX, EX-L, andCanadian EX-L models)

U.S. LX-VP andEX-L models

U.S. EX andCanadianEX-L models

SEEK BARSEEK BAR

(U.S. EX-L, EX-SE, and Canadian EX, EX-L modelswith rear entertainment system)STEREO INDICATOR

０７／０５／０９　１１：２８：５６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２２　

－－

－

－

－＋

－

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the PWR/VOL knob or theAM/FM button. (AM or FM buttonon U.S. EX model and Canadianmodel).Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob.The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button). On theFM band, ST will be displayed if thestation is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction in AM is notavailable.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwelve stations.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Each preset button(1 6) can store one station on AM,and two stations on FM.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the /( ) or /( )side of the bar, then release it.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To Play the Radio

To Select a Station

PRESETSEEK

SCAN

TUNE

Playing the Radio

118

０７／０５／０９　１１：２９：０６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２３　

－

－

－If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE/SOUNDknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Press the MODE or SOUND knobrepeatedly to display the Bass (BAS),Treble (TRE), Fader (FAD), andBalance (BAL) settings.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the system is turnedoff.

76

To turn off auto selectAUTO SELECT

Balance/Fader

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Audio System Lighting

Playing the Radio

Features

119

０７／０５／０９　１１：２９：１５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２４　

－

－

While you are listening to the radio,you can change to another band bypressing the AUDIO button next tothe navigation system screen, andthen touching the desired band icon(FM1, FM2, or AM).

AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUNDare adjustable from the navigationscreen. For an explanation of thesefunctions, see pages and .

Touch theA.SEL icon to activate the auto selectfunction. You will see A.SEL flashingon the display.

Touch the SCAN icon toactivate the scan function. You willsee SCAN on the display. Touch theicon again to deactivate it.

In addition to the knobs, buttons, andbars on the radio control panel, youcan operate some of the radiocontrols on the navigation systemscreen.

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

118 119



Playing the Radio

AUTO SELECT

SCAN

Operating the Radio on theNavigation System Screen

Voice Control System

120

０７／０５／０９　１１：２９：２３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２５　

－

－＋－

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

These modes adjustthe strength of the sound comingfrom each speaker. Left/Rightbalance adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while Front/Rear faderadjusts the front-to-back strength.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjustthe front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’or ‘‘RR’’ icon.

To see the audio display when youare finished adjusting the sound,wait 5 seconds.To adjust the sound, push the

AUDIO button, then enter the soundgrid by touching the SOUND icon onthe display.

To adjust the trebleand bass, touch or on each sideof the treble or bass adjustment bar.The adjustment bar shows you thecurrent setting.

76

Playing the Radio

Audio System Lighting

Left/Right Balance and Front/Rear Fader

Treble/Bass

Adjusting the SoundF

eatures

121

AUDIO BUTTON

０７／０５／０９　１１：２９：３１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２６　

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Radio Reception

122

０７／０５／０９　１１：２９：４０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２７　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Radio Reception

Features

123

０７／０５／０９　１１：２９：４６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２８　

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

124

PWR/VOLKNOB

DISP/MODE BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR PRESET BUTTONSSCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

TUNE KNOB

PRESET BUTTONSSCAN BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

DISP/MODE BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

XM BUTTON XM BUTTON

U.S. LX-VP and EX-L models U.S. EX-L and EX-SE models with rear entertainment system

０７／０５／０９　１１：２９：５２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１２９　

－

CONTINUED

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Satellite Radioanywhere in the United States,except Hawaii and Alaska.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.The navigation system screen alsoshows all XM information when theAUDIO button is pressed.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio

system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob. The last channelyou listened to will show in thedisplay.You can also change to the XM radiowhile you are listening to an FMstation, AM station, CD, etc., bytouching the XM1 or XM2 icon onthe audio display (navigation systemscreen).

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:Channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

U.S. LX-VP, EX-L, and EX-SE modelsonly


Operating the XM Radio

MODE

Features

125


０７／０５／０９　１１：３０：０３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３０　

－

－

－－

＋－

Pick a preset number (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the bar (icon) until you hear abeep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

To store a channel:

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Press the XM button again ortouch the other XM icon (XM1 orXM2) on the audio display. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Press either side of the CATEGORYbar ( or ) to select anothercategory.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN/RPT button ortouch the SCAN icon on the audiodisplay. The system plays eachchannel in numerical order for a fewseconds, then selects the nextchannel. When you hear a channelyou want to continue listening to,press the button or touch the iconagain.

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons or preset icons on the audiodisplay. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it.

Turn the TUNE knob leftor right to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Use the TUNE knob, theCATEGORY bar, or the SCANbuttons to tune to a desiredchannel.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

SCAN

PresetTUNE

126

０７／０５／０９　１１：３０：１３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３１　

－

－

－

－

－

－

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, oris not part of yoursubscription, or thischannel has no artist ortitle information at thistime.

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

XM is loading theaudio or programinformation.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult your dealer.


XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

Features

127

０７／０５／０９　１１：３０：１９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３２　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.


128

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０７／０５／０９　１１：３０：２４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３３　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM satellite radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the XM RADIObutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

Though it is not equipped with anXM satellite radio system, yourvehicle is ‘‘XM Ready.’’ If youpurchase an XM radio receiver, youcan connect it to your vehicle’s audiosystem to receive XM broadcasts.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

U.S. EX models

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


Features

129

０７／０５／０９　１１：３０：３４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３４　

Playing a Disc

130

PWR/VOL KNOB

REPEAT INDICATOR

CD SLOT

CD EJECTBUTTONCD SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR RANDOM INDICATOR

CD BUTTON

CD EJECTBUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

LOADBUTTON

CDBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CD SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

LOADBUTTON

CDBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONSSKIP BAR SKIP BAR

(Canadian LX models)

U.S. EX model is shown

(U.S. LX-VP, EX, EX-L, andCanadian EX-L models)

CD EJECT BUTTON

(U.S. EX-L, EX-SE, and Canadian EX, EX-L modelswith rear entertainment system)

０７／０５／０９　１１：３０：４２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３５　

－

To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON(II) position.

You operate the CD player/CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To select the CDplayer/CD changer, press the CDbutton. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Withthe in-dash CD changer, the disc andtrack numbers are displayed. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.

Insert a CD about halfway into theCD slot. The drive will pull the CD inthe rest of the way and begin to playit. When the system reaches the endof the disc, it will return to thebeginning and play the disc again.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

To listen to satellite radio when a CDis playing, press the AUX/XM or XMbutton.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button(AM or FM button). Press the CDbutton again to switch back to theCD player.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Onmodels with navigation system,touch the appropriate disc icon. Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence.

On models with Satellite RadioLX models

Playing a Disc, Disc Changer

To Play a CDF

eatures

131

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０７／０５／０９　１１：３０：５０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３６　

－＋

－

＋－

－

－

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

Insert the CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD loaded indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

On the upper left side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinking,and the green CD load indicatorwill come on.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again inthe display, insert the next CD intothe CD slot.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the LOAD buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for 10 seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

Each time you press andrelease /( ), the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release /( )to skip backward to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the /( ) or /( ). You will see CUE or REW inthe display.

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press it again to turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks in random order. To activaterandom play, press and release theRDM button. You will see RDM inthe display. This continues until youpress the RDM button again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Except for LX model

Loading CDs in the In-dash CDChanger

SKIP

REPEAT

RANDOM


132

０７／０５／０９　１１：３１：００　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３７　

On vehicles with navigation systemOn vehicles with navigation system


On LX modelsWhen you press the RDM button ortouch the TRACK RANDOM icon onthe screen, the system plays thetracks of the current disc in randomorder. You will see RDM (TRACKRANDOM) in the display. To turnthis feature off, press the RDMbutton (touch TRACK RANDOM)again.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.Press the AM/FM button to switchto the radio while a CD is playing.Press the CD button to play the CD.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the CD will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

When you press and release the RPTbutton or touch the TRACKREPEAT icon on the screen, thesystem continuously replays thecurrent track. As a reminder, youwill see RPT (TRACK REPEAT) inthe display. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button, or touch theTRACK REPEAT icon again.

When you press and hold the RPTbutton until D-RPT (DISC REPEAT)is in the display, or when you touchthe DISC REPEAT icon on thescreen, the system continuouslyreplays the current disc. As areminder, you will see D-RPT in thedisplay.


Random Play within a Disc To Stop Playing a CDTrack Repeat

Disc Repeat

Features

133

０７／０５／０９　１１：３１：０９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３８　

－＋

To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject ( ) button. Whena disc is removed from a slot, thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 15 seconds, the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc willreload into the system and willremain there in a pause mode.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the system beeps.

Load the desired CDs into themagazine, and load the magazineinto the changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The CD and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different CD, use the preset 5(DISC ) or preset 6 (DISC )button. If you select an empty slot inthe magazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot.

Except for LX model Optional on LX models


Removing CDs from the In-dashCD Changer

Operating the Optional CDChanger

134

０７／０５／０９　１１：３１：１７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１３９　

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly or possibly jam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the CD changer.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping. Seethis page.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

Features

135

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０７／０５／０９　１１：３１：２６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４０　

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, andexcessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.


Additional Information ofRecommended Discs

136

Sealed With PlasticRing

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

With Label/Sticker

Bubbled/Wrinkled

０７／０５／０９　１１：３１：３６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４１　

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

4. 5.


Features

137

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

０７／０５／０９　１１：３１：４５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４２　

Error Message

Error Message

Cause

Cause

Solution

Solution

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error,or a DVD hasbeen loaded in theCD player

High Temperature

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error,or a DVD hasbeen loaded in theCD player

High Temperature

Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD. Check ifit is inserted correctly in the CD player.Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged. Formore information, see page 136.Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD. Checkthe CD for damage or deformation. For moreinformation, see page 136. If the CD cannot be pulledout, or the error message does not disappear after theCD is ejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD. Check ifit is inserted correctly in the CD player.Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged. Formore information, see page 136.Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD. Checkthe CD for damage or deformation. For moreinformation, see page 136. If the CD cannot be pulledout, or the error message does not disappear after theCD is ejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

LX models


Disc Player Error Messages

138

０７／０５／０９　１１：３１：５７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４３　

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD magazine in theCD changer.

Press the magazine EJECT button and pull itout. Check for an error message, and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.Insert a CD.

Press the magazine EJECT button and pull itout. Check for an error message and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.This message should disappear when thetemperature returns to normal.Insert the CD magazine.





Optional on LX models

Disc Changer Error Messages

Features

139

０７／０５／０９　１１：３２：０５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４４　

If you are playing a CD

If you are listening to the radio

Except for LX models , use the CHbutton to skip to the beginning of thenext track. You will see the CD andtrack number in the display.

, use theCH button to go to the next presetstation. You will see the number ofthe preset button in the display. Tochange bands, press the AM/FMbutton.The MODE button changes the

audio mode between FM1, FM2, AM,XM, CD, and DVD/AUX (if a disc isinserted).

The CH button has three functions,depending on whether you arelistening to the radio, or playing aCD.

The middle button adjusts thevolume. Press the top or bottom ofthe button and hold it until thedesired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

Remote Audio Controls

140

CH BUTTON

VOLUMEBUTTON

MODEBUTTON

０７／０５／０９　１１：３２：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４５　

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost when thepower was disconnected.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons (icons onvehicles with navigation system) toenter the code. The code is on theradio code card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have ten tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin ten attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

Your vehicle’s audio system maydisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five-digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a radiocode card that lists your audiosystem’s code and serial numbers. Itis best to store this card in a safeplace at home. In addition, youshould write the audio system’sserial number in this owner’s manual.


Radio Theft Protection

Features

141

０７／０５／０９　１１：３２：１８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４６　

Setting the Clock

142

CLOCK

H BUTTON

M BUTTON

CLOCK CLOCK BUTTON

H BUTTON RESET BUTTON

M BUTTON

SET BUTTON

LX models

LX-VP, EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models(U.S. EX model shown)

０７／０５／０９　１１：３２：２３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４７　

－

＋

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing andholding the clock button, thenpressing the RESET (preset 6)button sets the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the clock setsforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

The display shows the time when theignition is in the ACCESSORY (I) orthe ON (II) position.Press and hold the SET (TUNE)button until the numbers flash.Change the hours by pressing theH ( ) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M ( )button until the numbers advance tothe desired time. When you arefinished, press the SET button again.

Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

Press and hold the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button. Change the hours bypressing the H (preset 4) buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time. Change the minutes bypressing the M (preset 5) buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time. When you are finished,release the CLOCK button.

LX models Except for LX models

On models with navigation system

Setting the Clock

Features

143

０７／０５／０９　１１：３２：２９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４８　

Rear Entertainment System

144

PAUSEBUTTON

REAR POWERBUTTON

REAR CONTROL OFF ICON

REAR SPEAKER OFF ICON

DVD/AUX BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

REAR CTRL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

REAR ICON

U.S. EX-L, EX-SE, and Canadian EX, EX-L models

U.S. model is shown

０７／０５／０９　１１：３２：３４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１４９　

Press the REAR PWR button. Toturn on the rear controls (ceilingpanel/remote control), press the RRCTRL knob. The system’s iconshows in the upper display. Yourpassengers can then operate the rearsystem with the control panel in theceiling. The rear control panel can beused as a remote control when it isdetached from the ceiling unit. Pressthe RR CTRL knob again to turn therear controls off. You will see theRear Controls Off icon in the upperdisplay.

When you turn on the system, therear speakers are automaticallyturned off if the rear system selectsa different entertainment sourcethan the front system. You will seethe Rear Speakers Off icon in theupper display. The sound for the rearsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones.

The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to.

If you want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until the Rear SpeakersOff icon goes off.

The rear system selects the source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in thedisplay. You should select anothersource or insert a DVD.

Your vehicle is equipped with a rearentertainment system that includes aDVD player for the enjoyment of therear passengers.

With this system, the rearpassengers can enjoy a differententertainment source (AM/FMradio, XM radio, CD changer, orDVD player) than the front seatoccupants. The audio is broadcastthrough the supplied wirelessheadphones.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position to operate the rearentertainment system.

If equipped To Turn On the System Rear Speakers


Features

145

NOTE:

０７／０５／０９　１１：３２：４２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５０　

＊

＊

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, turn theRR CTRL knob clockwise. Theamber RR LED comes on to showthat the control panel is enabled.

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can play DVDvideo discs and CDs. It featuresDolby noise reduction.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To play the radio, the buttons for thefront entertainment system have thesame functions.

If a CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or CD changer, select CD/CHG. If the CD is loaded in thelower player, select DVD/AUX.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To Select Rear Entertainmentfrom the Front Control Panel

Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel


146

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPEN BUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN

０７／０５／０９　１１：３２：４９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５１　

－

－

Turn the Rear CTRL knob clockwise.The amber Rear LED comes on toshow that the control panel is nowenabled.

Insert a DVD into the DVD/CDplayer below the front panel.

Push the DVD in halfway, the drivewill pull it in the rest of the way.

Press the PLAY button ifthe DVD does not start playingautomatically.

Press the PAUSE buttonto pause the DVD. Press the buttonagain or press PLAY to resume.Pause works only with the DVDplayer.

CONTINUED

PLAY

PAUSE


Features

147

EJECTBUTTON

PLAY BUTTON PAUSEBUTTON

REAR CTRL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

U.S. model is shown

０７／０５／０９　１１：３２：５７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５２　

－－＋

－

＋

－

Press the eject button toremove the DVD from the drive.

Press and hold thebutton to move forward; you will

see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press andhold the button to movebackward; you will see ‘‘REV’’ in thedisplay. Release the button when thesystem reaches the point you want.

Each time you press and release thebutton of the SEEK/SKIP, the

system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track orchapter. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track orchapter. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track orchapter.

To return front panel control to thefront audio system, turn the REARCTRL knob counterclockwise.

To turn on the rear entertainmentsystem from the rear control panel,press the PWR button. Use the AM/FM button, XM button (U.S. models),CD button, DVD/AUX button (U.S.models), or AUX button (Canadianmodels) to select the entertainmentsource. The selected source will beshown in the display. Make sure therear control operation has not beendisabled with the REAR CTRL knobon the front panel.


EJECTSEEK/SKIP

To Return to Front AudioControls

Using the Rear Control Panel

148

０７／０５／０９　１１：３３：０３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５３　

▲ ▼

▲

▼

▲ ▼

Use the and buttons to select astation from the preset buttons.Press the button to tune the radioto a higher frequency, or press the

button to tune to a lowerfrequency. Pressing the or

button causes the system tosearch up or down the band for astation with a strong signal. You willsee SEEK in the display.

Use the and buttons to select astation from the preset buttons.Press the button to search upthe channels in the channel mode.The system will search up thechannels within the category whenthe radio is in the category mode.Press the button to searchdown the channels in the channelmode. The system will search down

the channels within the categorywhen the radio is in the categorymode.

CONTINUED

On U.S. models


To Play the Radio from the RearControl Panel

To Play the XM Radio from theRear Control Panel

Features

149

U.S. model is shown

AM/FM BUTTON PWR BUTTON DVD/AUX BUTTON

XM BUTTON CD BUTTON

０７／０５／０９　１１：３３：１０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５４　

▲ ▼

Press the or button toselect another category.

Pressing and holding the DISPbutton for more than 5 seconds willchange the search mode betweenChannel Search and CategorySearch. Each time you press andrelease the DISP button, the displayabove the rear control panel changesin the following sequence: ChannelNumber, Category Name, MusicName, Artist Name, Channel Name,and back to Channel Number.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,select them by pressing the CDbutton. If a CD is loaded in the DVDplayer, press the DVD/AUX button.Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or button.The system will continue to movethrough the track. Press the

button to move forward, or thebutton to move backward.

Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changerand the overhead screen is not open,pressing the or button changesthe discs.


To Play a CD from the RearControl Panel

150

０７／０５／０９　１１：３３：１６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５５　

The video screen is for use by rearseat passengers only. The driver andfront seat passenger should not tryto view the screen while driving.

Press the button when youwant to pause the DVD. Press thisbutton again to go back to PLAY.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current chapter.

To move rapidly within a chapter,press and hold the or

button. The system willcontinue to move through the

chapter. Press the button tomove forward, or the button tomove backward. Release the buttonwhen the system reaches the pointyou want.To select the menu on the DVD,press the MENU/SCROLL button(U.S. models) or MENU button(Canadian models). Use the ,

, , and buttons tomove to the desired menu selection,then press the ENT button to enteryour selection.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To Play a DVD from the RearControl Panel


Features

151

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPENBUTTON ENT BUTTON

DISP BUTTON

MENU/SCROLL BUTTONOVERHEAD SCREENU.S. model is shown

０７／０５／０９　１１：３３：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５６　

When you press the DISP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the title,chapter, elapsed time, and personalsurround logo are displayed(STATUS 1).

When you press the DISP buttonagain, the subtitle, audio, angle,sound characteristics, and personalsurround logo are displayed(STATUS 2).

To go back to play, press the DISPbutton.

DISP Button


152

０７／０５／０９　１１：３３：３３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５７　

When you press the SETUP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the DVD’ssetup menu is displayed at thebottom of the screen. You can thenchange various settings of play mode,personal surround, and display. Togo back to play without changing anysetting, press the RETURN orSETUP button, or select ‘‘Close’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

When you select ‘‘Play Mode’’ bypressing the or button, theplay mode setup menu is displayedabove the ‘‘Play Mode’’ icon.

When you press the MENU buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the DVD’smain menu is displayed. To go backto play, press the RETURN button.

CONTINUED

MENU Button System Messages Play Mode


Features

153

０７／０５／０９　１１：３３：４０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５８　

▼ ▲▼ ▲

▼ ▲

Top Menu Audio

When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’using the or button, the DVD’stitle menu is displayed. This menu isalso displayed when you press theMENU button while a DVD is notplaying.

When you select ‘‘Audio’’ from theplay mode setup menu by pressingthe or button, you will see asubmenu of the dubbed language.

The selectable languages vary fromDVD to DVD, and this feature maynot be available on some DVDs.

Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu.

Select the desired language bypressing the or button. Thesound characteristics (Dolby Digital,LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recordedwith the selected language are alsodisplayed next to the language.

To go back to play, press the returnbutton.


154

０７／０５／０９　１１：３３：４８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１５９　

▼ ▲

▼▲ ▼ ▲

▼ ▲

Subtitle Angle

To turn the subtitle on and off, select‘‘Subtitle’’ from the setup menu bypressing the or button. You willsee submenu ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’ Select‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON’’ by pressing the or

button.

If more than one subtitle language isavailable, you will see the languagecurrently selected when you select‘‘ON’’ in the previous step.Select the desired subtitle languageby pressing the or button.Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu.

On some DVDs, the scenes arerecorded by more than one camera,giving different viewpoints of thesame scene. To change the angle,select ‘‘Angle’’ from the setup menu.You will see a submenu if there aredifferent angles available.Select the number on the submenuby pressing the or button.Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu. CONTINUED


Features

155

０７／０５／０９　１１：３３：５８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６０　

▼ ▲

▼ ▲

▼ ▲

▼▲

Search

When you select ‘‘Search’’ from theplay mode setup menu, you will seethe submenu shown above. In theleft submenu, you can selectbetween ‘‘Title’’ and ‘‘Chapter.’’ Theright submenu displays the currenttitle or chapter number and the totalnumber of titles or chapters.

To do a title search, select ‘‘Title’’ bypressing the or button. Changethe number on the right submenu bypressing the or button, andpress the ENT button to begin thetitle search. If you press theRETURN button, the display returnsto the play mode setup menu withoutdoing the search.

To do a chapter search, select‘‘Chapter’’ by pressing the orbutton. Change the number on theright submenu by pressing the or

button, and press the ENT buttonto begin the chapter search. If youpress the RETURN button, thedisplay returns to the play modesetup menu without doing the search.


156

０７／０５／０９　１１：３４：０４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６１　

NumInput

A numerical command can be issuedto a DVD by inputting a two digitnumber, and a button number can beselected on the screen.

Select and enter the second digitnumber the same way. The cursorwill automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’icon when you press the ENT button.Press the ENT button to enter thenumber command. To go back to theDVD screen, press the RETURNbutton.

Select the first digit number usingthe , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. If you want tochange the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’and press the ENT button, thenselect and enter the new number.

Select the ‘‘Num Input’’ from the playmode setup menu. The screen willchange as shown above. If you selectthe ‘‘Move Key’’ using the ,

, , or button, andpress the ENT button, the NumInput display on the screen will

change from the left side to rightside or right to left.

CONTINUED


Features

157

０７／０５／０９　１１：３４：１３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６２　

▼ ▲

When you select ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ by pressing the

or button, the personalsurround setup menu is displayedabove the ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ icon. You can adjust these display

settings:Back LightContrastBrightnessTintColor

To adjust the display, select‘‘Display’’ by pressing the or

button, and enter yourselection by pressing the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Selecting one of the sound effects,Cinema, Music, or Voice, from thepersonal surround menu allows youto change the sound in yourheadphones to match the disc youare playing.

Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’by pressing the or button, andenter your selection by pressing theENT button. The ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ logo is displayed inthe upper right corner of the screen.

If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logodisappears, and there will be nospecial sound effect.

Personal Surround Display


158

０７／０５／０９　１１：３４：２１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６３　

▼ ▲▼ ▲

Select the quality you want to adjustby pressing the or button, andthen pressing the ENT button. Theadjustment bar is displayed next tothe selected item. Adjust the settingby pressing the or button.When you are finished with youradjustment, press the ENT button.

If you want to set the display to thedefault setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ bypressing the or button, and,then pressing the ENT button.

The display changes as shown above.

Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENTbutton. You will see the message‘‘Default display settings applied’’ onthe display for 5 seconds.

CONTINUED


Features

159

０７／０５／０９　１１：３４：２８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６４　

Screen ModeYou can set the screen mode tothese settings:

NormalWideZoomFull


160

Normal Wide

Zoom Full

０７／０５／０９　１１：３４：３３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６５　

▼ ▲

Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressingthe or button, then pressthe ENT button.

The selectable setting menu isdisplayed, and the current setting ishighlighted in blue.

Select the desired setting bypressing the or button, thenpress the ENT button.

The selected setting will behighlighted in blue for one second,and the screen returns to the playmode in the selected setting.

CONTINUED


Features

161

０７／０５／０９　１１：３４：３９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６６　

▼ ▲

When you press the SETUP buttonon the rear control panel when aDVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIALSETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.

When you select ‘‘Language’’ withthe or button, the menushown above appears.

To return to the stop or prestopscreen, select ‘‘Close’’ using the

or button, and then pressthe ENT, or the SETUP button.

To select the language used in theDISC menus, select ‘‘Menu Lang’’ bypressing the or button. You willsee the submenu next to ‘‘MenuLang.’’

There are two selectable menus:‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’

Menu LanguageINITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)


162

０７／０５／０９　１１：３４：４７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６７　

▼ ▲Select the desired language bypressing the or button, andthen pressing the ENT button.

The selectable languages are,English, French, Spanish, German,Italian, Dutch, and Japanese.

If you want another language thanthose listed, you need to enter thecode number of the desired language.Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown in the next column.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’menu.

CONTINUED


Features

163

０７／０５／０９　１１：３４：５４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６８　

▼ ▲

Audio Language

You can select the dubbed languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Audio Lang’’ by pressing the

or button. You will see thesubmenu next to ‘‘Audio Lang.’’

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.

If you made a mistake entering anumber, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the displaywith the , , , or

button, and press the ENTbutton on the control panel. Thenselect and enter the correct numberas described. The display returns tothe initial ‘‘Language’’ menu screen.

If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the displaychanges to the language code inputmode. Select the first number usingthe , , , or

button, and press the ENTbutton to enter it. Repeat this until allfour numbers are entered. When thefourth number is entered, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel to enter the newlanguage code.


164

０７／０５／０９　１１：３５：０２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１６９　

▼ ▲

Subtitle Language

You can select the subtitle languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Subtitle Lang’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu next to the ‘‘Subtitle Lang.’’

When you select ‘‘Others’’ at thebottom of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’screen, the above menu appears onthe screen.

Dynamic Range

‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces thedifferences between the loud andquiet sound levels throughout thedisc. When this is on, the loudersounds are lowered, and quietersounds are increased.

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.

CONTINUED

INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)


Features

165

０７／０５／０９　１１：３５：１１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７０　

▼ ▲ ▼ ▲When you select the ‘‘DynamicRange’’ by pressing the orbutton, you will see the submenunext to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ asshown above.

To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe or button, and thenpress the ENT button.

Angle Mark

When you switch to another anglewhile playing a DVD, the angle markis displayed in the upper right cornerof the screen.

You can set the system to display ornot display this angle mark.

Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing theor button. The above submenu

appears. If you want the angle markto be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the

or button, and then pressthe ENT button. The display returnsto the ‘‘Others’’ menu.


166

ANGLE MARK

０７／０５／０９　１１：３５：１８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７１　

▼ ▲

Parental Control Level

You can place an auditory restrictionby changing the parental controllevel. The higher the level number,the lower the restriction.

Select ‘‘Parental Level’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu shown above. If you select‘‘No,’’ and press the ENT button, thedisplay returns to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’the display changes as shown above.To change the level, you need toenter your four digit password.Select the number for the first digitby pressing the , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel. CONTINUED


Features

167

０７／０５／０９　１１：３５：２６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７２　

▼ ▲

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat theparental control level steps until youenter the correct password.

If you enter the password correctly,you can then change the parentalcontrol level.

Once you correctly enter thepassword, press the or buttonto change the level, and then pressthe ENT button to enter yourselection.

Changing the Password

The password was set to ‘‘1111’’when the vehicle left the factory.


168

０７／０５／０９　１１：３５：３２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７３　

To change the password, select‘‘Password.’’ You will see the abovemenu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe ‘‘Others’’ menu.

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat thepassword setting steps until youenter the correct password.

Select the first number by pressingthe , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. Repeat this until allfour numbers are entered. When youenter the fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel.

CONTINUED


Features

169

０７／０５／０９　１１：３５：３９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７４　

▲If you forget the password, select‘‘Password,’’ and press the button10 times.

The display changes as shown above.If you want to use the defaultpassword (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ andpress the ENT button.

The message ‘‘Default passwordsetting applied’’ is displayed for5 seconds.


170

０７／０５／０９　１１：３５：４４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７５　

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to operate the rearentertainment system, have yourdealer replace the batteries as soonas possible.

The rear control panel can bedetached from the ceiling unit andused as a remote control. To removeit from the ceiling unit, press therelease button. The control panel willswing down partway. Pivot it downfurther past the detent until itdetaches from the hinge. To reinstallit, reverse the procedure.

Battery type: BR3032


CONTINUED

Remote Control Replacing the Remote ControlBatteries


Features

171

COVER

RELEASE BUTTON

０７／０５／０９　１１：３５：５１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７６　

The tips on how to handle andprotect DVDs are basically the sameas those for compact discs. Refer to‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page .

Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be playedin this system.

The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can playDVDs and CDs bearing the abovemarks on their packages or jackets.

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.

135

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.


This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.


Protecting DVDsPlayable DVDs

172

０７／０５／０９　１１：３５：５９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７７　

Message Solution

ERROR F0ERROR F2Invalid region codeInvalid disc

Parental control active.Change level to view.

Eject the disc and reinsert it.

Use a disc with the regional designation of ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘All’’.The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disccompatible with this system.Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control level (seepages 167 and 168 ).





DVD Player Error Messages


Features

173

０７／０５／０９　１１：３６：０６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７８　

Each headphone uses one AAAbattery. The battery is under thecover on the left earpiece. Toremove the cover, insert a coin in theslot and twist it slightly to pry thecover away from the earpiece. Pullthe cover outward, and pivot it out ofthe way.

Some state and local governmentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. When using the headphones,make sure you wear them correctly:L (left) and R (right) are marked onthe sides of the frame. The antennasare in the front of the earpieces. Ifyou wear the headphones backwards,the antennas will be aimed awayfrom the system, affecting the soundquality and range.

To use the headphones, pivot theearpieces outward. This turns themon. To adjust the volume, turn thedial on the bottom of the rightearpiece. When you remove theheadphones, the earpiecesautomatically pivot inward, and theheadphones turn off. When not inuse, store the headphones in thepocket of either front seat.

Replacing BatteriesWireless Headphones


174

VOLUMEDIAL TAB

０７／０５／０９　１１：３６：１３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１７９　

There are three headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.

V = Video jackL = Left audio jackR = Right audio jack

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are on theback of the center consolecompartment.

Remove the battery. Install the newbattery in the earpiece as shown inthe diagram next to the battery slot.Slide the cover back into place on theearpiece, then press down on theback edge to lock it in place.


Auxiliary Input Jacks


Features

175

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSBATTERY

COVERHEADPHONE CONNECTORS

VOLUMEDIALS

０７／０５／０９　１１：３６：２１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８０　

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle. This alarm continues for 2minutes, then the system resets. Toreset an alarm system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s front door with the key orthe remote transmitter.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, the tailgate, or any door isnot fully closed. If the system will notset, check the Door and TailgateOpen Monitor on the instrumentpanel (see page ) to see if thedoors and the tailgate are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the tailgate, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter, will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

66

On EX, EX-L and EX-SE models

Security System

176

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０７／０５／０９　１１：３６：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８１　

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push in the cruise control masterbutton. The indicator on theinstrument panel will come on.

The CRUISE button can beleft on, even when the system is notin use.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).Press and release the SET/

wheel. The indicator on theinstrument panel comes on to

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.

1.

2.

3.

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

177

NOTE:

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０７／０５／０９　１１：３６：３６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８２　

DECEL button on the steering

show the system is now activated.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.Push the cruise control masterbutton.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap on the brake pedal, the systemwill remember the previously setcruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the cruise control masterbutton turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Changing the Set Speed Canceling Cruise Control

Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

178

０７／０５／０９　１１：３６：４９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８３　

The direction and center positionicons come on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. The system then begins tocheck the vehicle direction andilluminates the appropriate icon(s).

The compass can be affected bydriving near power lines or stations,across bridges, through tunnels,over railroad crossings, past largevehicles, or driving near largeobjects that cause magneticinterference. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

Your vehicle has a compass in therear view mirror. The compassindicates the vehicle direction withilluminated letters; N (north), S(south), W (west), and E (east). Thecenter blue icon in the compass isalways on. It serves as a referencepoint.

To turn the compass on or off, pressthe compass button on the back ofthe rear view mirror.

The compass mirror has a lightsensor behind the right side of therear view mirror. Make sure theextended sun visor or an accessory isnot covering the sensor.

If equippedCompass Function

Compass

Features

179

COMPASSBUTTON

CENTER ICON

REAR VIEW MIRROR

０７／０５／０９　１１：３６：５７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８４　

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to continually showthe wrong direction, do this.

Drive the vehicle slowly in circlesat less than 5 mph (8 km/h) untilthe center icon turns blue. Thisicon also turns blue by continuingto drive the vehicle under normaldriving conditions. When you seean actual heading on the compass,calibration is completed.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Find the zone for your area on thezone map (see page ). Eachzone number (1 through 15)corresponds to a compass zone onthe table (see page ).

Press and hold the compassbutton for about 3 seconds. Whenall of the direction icons begin toblink, release the button.

The blue direction icon(s) blinkand show the current zone.

If the zone is incorrect, press andrelease the compass buttonrepeatedly to get to the correctnumber.

The compass will return to thenormal display about 4 secondsafter you stop adjusting a zonenumber.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

With the blue center icondisplayed, press and hold thecompass button for about 6seconds. When the center iconturns red, release the button.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

5.

181

181

Compass Calibration

Compass Zone Selection

Compass

180

NOTE:

０７／０５／０９　１１：３７：０７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８５　

Compass

Features

181

Zone Map Compass Display for Each Zone

０７／０５／０９　１１：３７：１１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８６　

▼▲

When in reverse, the touch screenand navigation system ‘‘hard’’buttons are locked out, except the‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ button allows you to adjustthe brightness of the rearviewcamera image.

Since the rearview camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep therearview camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens. To avoidscratching the lens when you clean it,use a moist, soft cloth.

On EX-L models with navigation system

Rearview Camera and Monitor

182

REAR VIEW CAMERA

The camera brightness cannot beadjusted by voice control.

０７／０５／０９　１１：３７：１７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８７　

The HomeLink

can be programmed to operate up to

around your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If equipped

CONTINUED

Features

183

０７／０５／０９　１１：３７：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８８　

Homelink® Universal Transceiver

General Safety InformationBefore programming your HomeLinkto operate a garage door opener,confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection

If your garage door was manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982, you may not beable to program HomeLink to operateit. These units do not have safetyfeatures that cause the motor to stopand reverse it if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury. Do not use HomeLink with

any garage door opener that lacks Important Safety Precautionssafety stop and reverse features.

Units manufactured between April 1,1982 and January 1, 1993 may beequipped with safety stop and reversefeatures. If your unit does not have anexternal entrapment protectionsystem, an easy test to confirm the function and performance of the safetystop and reverse feature is to lay a2x4 under the closing door. The door

other safety and reverse stop features.

contacting the piece of wood.

As an additional safety feature, garagedoor openers manufactured after

should stop and reverse upon

January 1, 1993 are required to haveexternal entrapment protectionsystems, such as an electronic eye,which detect an object obstructing the

door.

Refer to the safety information thatcame with your garage door openerto test that the safety features arefunctioning properly. If you do not have this information, contact the manufacturer of the equipment.

Before programming Home Link to a garage door or gate opener, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential injury or damage.

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage.

UniversalTransceiver built into your vehicle

three remote controlled devices

system, such as an "electronic eye," or

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

transmitter button and one of the

time. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remote

transmitting after a short time.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release both

If the red indicator in HomeLink

then rapidly, release both

If the red indicator in HomeLink

not begin to flash rapidly),

184

０７／０５／０９　１１：３７：３８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１８９　


2.

buttons, and go to step 4.

Go to step 3.

transmitter may stop

Press and hold the remote

HomeLink buttons at the same

begins to flash slowly at first,

3.

buttons, and go to step 4.

repeat steps 1 thru 3.

continues to flash slowly (does

－ If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

If you are training the second or

Hold the end of the garage door

inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

1.

Before you begin

third buttons, go directly to step 1.

opener remote transmitter 1 to 3

Training HomeLink

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

location will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

for about 1 second. It shouldoperate the garage door.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener is needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

garage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

2.4.

1.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

Features

185

TRAINING BUTTON

０７／０５／０９　１１：３７：４７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９０　


garage door opener unit. TheFind the ‘‘learn’’ button on your

3. Press the “learn” button on the

5. Press the HomeLink button again

If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work go

operate any other compatibleremotely controlled device aroundyour home (lighting, automaticgate, security system, etc.).

pushing it for about 1 second.

to step 5.

5. Push and hold the HomeLink

for 2 seconds then stays on, you

Code System’’ (see page 185 ).

button and watch the red indicatoron Homelink.

If the indicator stays on, press

If the indicator flashes rapidly

the Homelink button again; the

have a rolling code transmitter:

should operate.remotely controlled device

other two HomeLink buttons to

go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling

6. Repeat these steps to train the

4. Test the Homelink button by




To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, and

‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page).

1.

2.

184

Erasing Codes

Retraining a ButtonCustomer Assistance

186

０７／０５／０９　１１：３７：５８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９１　

follow steps 2 thru 5 under


Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 188.................Fuel Recommendation . 188

.........Service Station Procedures . 189....................................Refueling . 189

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 190

...................................Oil Check . 191.............Engine Coolant Check . 192

...............................Fuel Economy . 193...Accessories and Modifications . 196

.............................Carrying Cargo . 198

Before Driving

Before

Driving

187

０７／０５／０９　１１：３８：０２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９２　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

Premium fuel is recommended whentowing in certain conditions (seepage ).

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

228

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

188

０７／０５／０９　１１：３８：１４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９３　

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.

You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedures

RefuelingB

eforeD

riving

189

Pull

SLIT

ATTACHMENT FUEL FILL CAP

０７／０５／０９　１１：３８：２１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９４　

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

2.1.

5.

6.

283


Opening and Closing the Hood

190

LATCH

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０７／０５／０９　１１：３８：３０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９５　

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

1.

2.

3. 4.

3.

245


Adding Engine Oil

Oil CheckB

eforeD

riving

191

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

SUPPORT ROD CLIP

GRIP

０７／０５／０９　１１：３８：４１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９６　

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

248

242Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks


192

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

０７／０５／０９　１１：３８：４６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９７　

－

－

－

－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallonachieved is also provided.

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPG

Combined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

193

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

City MPG

EstimatedAnnual Fuel Cost

Highway MPG

０７／０５／０９　１１：３８：５６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９８　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

An under-inflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.242

Fuel Economy Factors

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

245

Fuel Economy

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

194

０７／０５／０９　１１：３９：１１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０１９９　

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

Reset trip counter to zero.Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.

Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

1)2)3)4)

Fuel Economy

Calculating Fuel Economy Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Before

Driving

195

Gallonsof fuel

Miles perGallon

100 KilometersL per

100 km

Milesdriven

Liter

０７／０５／０９　１１：３９：１９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２００　

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

289

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

196

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０７／０５／０９　１１：３９：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２０１　

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Here are some examples:

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

197

０７／０５／０９　１１：３９：３５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２０２　

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Rear compartment

Console compartment

Rear cargo area, including thesecond and third row seats whenfolded flat

Front door and seat-back pockets

Glove box

Carrying Cargo

198

GLOVE BOX

CARGO AREACONSOLE COMPARTMENT

DOOR POCKETS

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

REAR COMPARTMENT

０７／０５／０９　１１：３９：４２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２０３　

－ ×

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit:

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.For example, if the amount equals850 lbs, and there will be five 150lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 100 lbs.(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)

The maximum load for your vehicleis 1,322 lbs (600 kg).

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Label Example

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

199

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０７／０５／０９　１１：３９：５２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２０４　

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

(5)

(6)

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Carrying Cargo

200

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



Max Load (1,322 lbs)



Cargo Weight(1,022 lbs)

Cargo Weight(722 lbs)

Cargo Weight(572 lbs)

０７／０５／０９　１１：４０：０５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２０５　

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you fold down the second orthird row seats, tie down itemsthat could be thrown about thevehicle during a crash or suddenstop.

57

Carrying Cargo

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

Before

Driving

201

０７／０５／０９　１１：４０：１３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２０６　

If equipped

You can use the cargo net to secureitems in the cargo area, and storesmall items between the two halvesof the net. To install the cargo net,hook the loops on the four corners ofthe net to the tabs at both sides ofthe tailgate sill.

Your vehicle also has a grocery hookon each side panel in the cargo area.They are designed to hold lightitems. Heavy objects may damagethe hook. Make sure any items puton each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs(3 kg).

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be properly secured onthe floor of the cargo area. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown forward in a crash or asudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used tocover the cargo area behind the thirdrow seats. When the third row seatsare folded down, the cargo cover canbe extended over the larger area. Donot install the cover over the largerarea if the third row seats are notfolded down.

Carrying Cargo

Cargo NetCargo HooksOptional Separation Net

Optional Cargo Cover

202

HOOK

０７／０５／０９　１１：４０：２１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２０７　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the VTM-4 system (4WDmodels only), the vehicle stabilityassist (VSA) system, the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer or drive off-highway.

........................Driving Guidelines . 204.......................Starting the Engine . 205

..............Automatic Transmission . 206..............................VTM-4 System . 210

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 211

...........................................Parking . 214.............................Braking System . 215

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 216Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 218.........................VSA Off Switch . 219

...........................Towing a Trailer . 220Off-Highway Driving

..................................Guidelines . 230

Driving

Driving

203

０７／０５／０９　１１：４０：２５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２０８　

Your vehicle has a higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with a four-wheel drive (4WD) system. Whenthe system senses a loss of front-wheel traction, it automaticallytransfers some power to the rearwheels. This gives you bettertraction and mobility.

You still need to exercise the samecare when accelerating, steering, andbraking that you would in a two-wheel drive vehicle.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.87

264

Four-wheel drive models

See page for additional driving off-highway guidelines.

230

Driving Guidelines

Preparing to Drive

204

０７／０５／０９　１１：４０：３８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２０９　

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

15

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

92

78

61

Driving Guidelines, Starting the Engine

Starting the EngineD

riving

205

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .80

０７／０５／０９　１１：４０：４９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１０　

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal, andpull the shift lever toward you. Youcannot shift out of Park when theignition switch is in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position.

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

206

SHIFT LEVER

０７／０５／０９　１１：４０：５６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１１　

－

－

－

－

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpull the shift lever towardsyou.

Pull the shift lever towardsyou.

Move the shift lever.

3

3

3

3

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for the vehicle speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Pull the shift levertowards you, then move it out ofPark.

Press the brakepedal and pull the shift lever towardsyou to shift from Park to reverse. Toshift from reverse to neutral, cometo a complete stop and then shift.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

209

CONTINUED

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Park (P)

Reverse (R)

Shift Lock Release


Driving

207

０７／０５／０９　１１：４１：０４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１２　

－－－This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected. Use D to provideengine braking when going down asteep hill. D can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears in stop-and-godriving.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

This position locks thetransmission in first gear. Byupshifting and downshifting through1, 2, D , and D, you can operate thetransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:

For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

To help reduce wheel spin.

3

33


Drive (D )

Engine Speed Limiter

First (1)Second (2)3

208

０７／０５／０９　１１：４１：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１３　

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pulling the shift lever does notshift the transmission out of Park:

Set the parking brake.

Push down on the key while youpull the shift lever towards you,and move it out of Park to neutral.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then install thecover. Press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover. Using asmall flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the edge of the cover to removeit.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

3.

4.

5.

6.1.

2.

Shift Lock Release


Driving

209

０７／０５／０９　１１：４１：２１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１４　

The vehicle must be stopped withthe engine running.

doany of the following:

Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.

Move the shift lever to D or D .Move the shift lever to first (1),second (2), or reverse (R) gear.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.The indicator in the button comeson.

The VTM-4 Lock will temporarilydisengage when the vehicle speedexceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). Theindicator in the button will remain on.

The variable torque management4WD (VTM-4) system automaticallytransfers varying amounts of enginetorque to the rear wheels underlower traction conditions.

If more traction is needed when yourvehicle is stuck, or is likely tobecome stuck, you can use theVTM-4 LOCK button to increasetorque to the rear wheels.

To get unstuck, apply light pressureto the accelerator pedal. Do not spinthe front tires for more than a fewseconds. Because of the amount oftorque applied to the rear tires, theyshould not spin. This is normal. Ifyou are not able to move the vehicle,stop and reverse direction.

1.

2.

3.3

To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,

VTM-4 System

210

Do not continuously spin the f ront tiresof your vehicle. Continuously spinningthe f ront tires can cause transmissionor rear dif f erential damage.

Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button ondry, paved roads. Driving on dry,paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON maydamage the rear dif f erential whenmaking a turn. Strange noise andvibration can also result.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４１：３２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１５　

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low, the sensor in thattire immediately sends a signal thatcauses the low tire pressureindicator and the appropriate tire onthe tire pressure monitor to come on.

272

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Driving

211

０７／０５／０９　１１：４１：４０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１６　

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified in the vehicle

placard and this owner’s manual (seepage ).

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

The appropriate tire indicator andlow tire pressure indicator comes onif a tire becomes significantlyunderinflated. See

on page .

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

263

295

211


Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low TirePressure Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitor

212

０７／０５／１０　１７：３８：５５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１７　




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure and tire monitor indicatorswill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer ora qualified technician.

After the flat tire is replaced with thespare tire, the low tire pressureindicator stays on while driving.After several miles (kilometers)driving, the TPMS indicator comeson and the low tire pressureindicator goes off. This is normal;the system cannot monitor the sparetire pressure. Manually check thespare tire pressure to be sure it iscorrect.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when the spare tire is replaced withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

272


Changing a Tire with TPMSD

riving

213

０７／０５／１０　１７：３９：０４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１８　

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Check the indicator on the driver’sdoor to verify that the securitysystem is set.

Lock the doors and the tailgate.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Turn off the lights.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

On vehicles with security system

Parking Tips

Parking

214

０７／０５／０９　１１：４２：０６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２１９　

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.Resting your foot on the pedal keeps

the brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectivenessand reduces brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System

Driving

215

０７／０５／０９　１１：４２：１３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２０　

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

216

０７／０５／０９　１１：４２：１７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２１　

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

284

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS Indicator Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

217

０７／０５／０９　１１：４２：２５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２２　

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink. Theremay also be some noise from theVSA hydraulic system.

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible (see page ).

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

64

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

218

０７／０５／０９　１１：４２：３３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２３　

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the vehicle stabilityassist system on and off.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

264

VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving

219

０７／０５／０９　１１：４２：４２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２４　

The weight that thetongue of a fully loaded trailer putson the hitch should be 5 to 10percent of the total trailer weight forboat trailers, and 8 to 15 percent oftotal trailer weight for all othertrailers. (See page for limits foryour towing situation). Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

Your vehicle has been designed totow a trailer, as well as carryingpassengers and their cargo. Tosafely tow a trailer, you shouldcarefully observe the load limits (seepage ), use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Be sure to read thesection on page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

Towing a trailer that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The maximumallowable weight of the trailer andeverything in or on it depends on thenumber of occupants in your vehicleand the type of trailer being towed(see page ).

199

223223

230

Load Limits

Off-HighwayDriving Guidelines

Tongue Load:Total Trailer Weight:

Towing a Trailer

220

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４２：４９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２５　

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle axles is:

The maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle and trailer is9,700 lbs (4,400 kg) with the properhitch and fluid coolers (see page

).

The GCWR must be reduced 2percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

225on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

4WD models:

2WD models:

4WD models:

2WD models:

Towing a Trailer

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR):

Driving

221

5,950 lbs (2,700 kg)

5,840 lbs (2,650 kg)

2,865 lbs (1,300 kg)

3,155 lbs (1,430 kg)

2,865 lbs (1,300 kg)

3,085 lbs (1,400 kg)

０７／０５／０９　１１：４２：５６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２６　

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale.For public scales in your area, checkyour local phone book, or contactyour trailer dealer or rental agencyfor assistance.To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scale,we recommend that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described.

Add the weight of your trailer (asquoted by the manufacturer) witheverything in or on the trailer. Thencheck the tables on page tomake sure you do not exceed thelimit for your conditions.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Measure from the ground to thebottom of the trailer hitch.

Connect the fully loaded trailer tothe hitch.

Measure again from the ground tothe same spot on the bottom of thehitch.

Subtract the second measurementfrom the first measurement, thenrefer to the following table.

1 ½’’2 ¼’’

3’’3 ¾’’

150 lbs (68 kg)250 lbs (114 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)

If the difference is more than 3 ¾inch, you have too much load on thetongue. Redistribute the load orremove cargo as needed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

223

Towing a Trailer

Estimating LoadsIf the

difference is:Estimated

tongue load is:

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

To Estimate the Tongue Load

222

０７／０５／０９　１１：４３：０７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２７　

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.

Towing is Not Recommended

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.

Towing is Not Recommended

Maximum Total Trailer Weight

Maximum Total Trailer Weight

Maximum Tongue Load

Maximum Tongue Load

Towing a Trailer

Driving

223

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:BOAT TRAILERS

OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7 kg)

of luggage in the cargo area.

4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,300 lbs (1,945 kg)4,100 lbs (1,855 kg)2,000 lbs (905 kg)

3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)3,300 lbs (1,490 kg)3,100 lbs (1,400 kg)2,700 lbs (1,220 kg)1,200 lbs (540 kg)

450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)220 lbs (100 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)220 lbs (100 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

０７／０５／０９　１１：４３：１６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２８　

To accurately check your loads atthe public scale, the vehicle andtrailer should be fully loaded, and alloccupants should stay in the vehiclewhile the attendant watches thescale.

Check the front gross axle weight.Limit: 2,865 lbs (1,300 kg)

Check the gross combined weight.Limit: 9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)Remember, maximum grosscombined weight should bedecreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

Check the weight of the hitchedtrailer. Write this number down.

Check the gross vehicle weight.Limit (4WD models):5,950 lbs (2,700 kg)Limit (2WD models):5,840 lbs (2,650 kg)Check the rear gross axle weight.Limit (4WD models):3,155 lbs (1,430 kg)Limit (2WD models):3,085 lbs (1,400 kg)If you cannot weigh the rear axledirectly, you can calculate the reargross axle weight by subtractingthe weight in step 1 from theweight in step 2.Limit (4WD models):3,086 lbs (1,400 kg)Limit (2WD models):2,976 lbs (1,350 kg)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads

224

０７／０５／０９　１１：４３：２６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２２９　

Check the weight of the unhitchedtrailer. Limit: See page .

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchaseHonda equipment whenever possible.

Your dealer offers a trailer packagethat includes a hitch, a ball mount, awiring harness, a heavy-dutytransmission fluid cooler, and aheavy-duty power steering fluidcooler.

Discuss any additional needs withyour trailer sales or rental agency,and make sure all equipment isproperly installed, maintained, andalso meets state, federal, province,and local regulations.

We strongly recommend that youhave your dealer install a Hondahitch. Using non-Honda equipmentmay result in serious damage to yourvehicle.

To help prevent overheating, aheavy-duty transmission fluid coolerand a heavy-duty power steeringfluid cooler are required for trailertowing. These coolers are availableonly from your dealer.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with yourvehicle, as an improperly adjustedweight distributing hitch may reducehandling, stability, and brakingperformance.

Calculate the tongue load.Subtract the weight in step 6 fromthe weight in step 7.Limit: See page .Recommended: see page .Range: 5-10% for boat trailers

8-15% for other trailers

7.

8.

223

223220

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Towing a Trailer

Hitch

Transmission Fluid Cooler andPower Steering Fluid Cooler

Weight Distributing Hitch

Driving

225

０７／０５／０９　１１：４３：３７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３０　

Honda requires that any trailer witha total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455kg) or more has its own brakes.

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicles hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. See page for propertire size, page for how to store afull size wheel and tire, and page

for information on changing aflat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

273

276267

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Brakes Safety Chains

Sway Control

Trailer Mirrors

Spare Tires

226

０７／０５／１８　１４：０３：０３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３１　

To get to your vehicle’s trailerlighting connector, open the tailgate,remove the cargo cover, thenremove the rear panel trim. Theconnector is on the left side.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check trailerlight requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.Your vehicle is equipped with aconnector to install a trailer lightingconnector that mates with yourvehicle.Refer to the above illustration forwiring information.

We recommend that you have yourdealer install a Honda wiring harnessand converter. This harness hasbeen designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary withtrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Improper equipment or installationcan cause damage to your vehicle’selectrical system and affect yourvehicle warranty. All items in or on the trailer are

properly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Pre-Tow ChecklistD

riving

227

GROUND(BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/WHITE)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

BATTERY POWER(YELLOW)

０７／０５／０９　１１：４３：５８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３２　

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

Towing performance can beaffected by high altitude, hightemperature, or when climbingsteep grades. Therefore, premiumfuel (premium unleaded gasolinewith pump octane number of 91 orhigher) is recommended whentowing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590kg).

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page ).

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.When towing a fixed-sided trailer(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph(88 km/h). At higher speeds, thetrailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

To prevent the transmission fromshifting frequently, drive in the Dposition.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

188

3

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Break-In Period

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer

228

０７／０５／０９　１１：４４：０８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３３　

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to D . Donot ‘‘ride’’ the brakes.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

If the vehicle’s tires slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4lock (see page ). DisengageVTM-4 lock as soon as the boat isout of the water to prevent damageto the VTM-4 system.

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .

210

285

3

bottomRemember, it

takes longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer.

Towing Your Vehicle

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Retrieving a Boat

Towing a Trailer

Driving

229

０７／０５／０９　１１：４４：１７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３４　

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be aware that a heavy load canreduce ground clearance and yourability to clear obstacles.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditionsallow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

Be sure to store cargo properly,and do not exceed your vehiclecargo load limits (see pages

and ).

Whenever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance allowsyou to occasionally travel on unpavedroads, such as campgrounds, picnicsites, and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trail-blazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. Be sure to pay extraattention to the precautions and tipsin this section, and get acquaintedwith your vehicle before leaving thepavement.

199 220

Important Safety PrecautionsGeneral Information

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

230

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner’smanual.Keep your speed low, anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４４：２６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３５　

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second (2) gear willhelp you have a smoother start onsnow or ice.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

do not try toturn around

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes


Driving

231

０７／０５／０９　１１：４４：３６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３６　

If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4Lock (see page ). Carefully try togo in the direction (forward orreverse) that you think will get youunstuck. Do not spin the tires at highspeeds. It will not help you get outand may cause damage to thetransmission or VTM-4 system.

If you are still unable to free yourself,your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear tow hooks designed for thispurpose.

Before driving through water, stop,get out if necessary, and make surethat:

The water is not deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles, orexhaust pipe. You could stall andnot be able to restart your engine.The water can also damageimportant vehicle components.

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.

The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.

The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

If you decide it is safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.Proceed without shifting or changingspeeds, and do not stop the vehicleor shut off the engine.

After driving through water, testyour brakes. If they got wet, gently‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowlyuntil they operate normally.

If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service maybe required. This service is notcovered by your warranties. Use a nylon strap to attach your

vehicle to the recovery vehicle, andcarefully take out the slack in thestrap. Once the strap is tight, therecovery vehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicleneeds good traction to avoidbecoming stuck, too.

210

If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream


232

０７／０５／０９　１１：４４：４６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３７　

You should never use a jack to try toget unstuck. Your vehicle couldeasily slip off the jack and hurt youor someone else.

You may be able to safely tow alightweight trailer (such as amotorcycle or small tent trailer) off-road if you follow these guidelines.

Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45kg).

Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,and avoid driving in hilly terrain.

Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.

Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.

Towing a Trailer Off-Road


Driving

233

０７／０５／０９　１１：４４：５３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３８　

234

０７／０５／０９　１１：４４：５５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２３９　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages in theinformation display, and instructionsfor simple maintenance tasks youmay want to take care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 236....................Maintenance Minder . 237

..............................Fluid Locations . 244........................Adding Engine Oil . 245

Changing the Engine Oil and...........................................Filter . 246

..............................Engine Coolant . 248....................Windshield Washers . 249

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 250..............................Differential Oil . 251

.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 251....................................Timing Belt . 252....................................Brake Fluid . 252

....................Power Steering Fluid . 253.............................................Lights . 254

.....................................Floor Mats . 260.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 260

.................................Wiper Blades . 261...........................................Wheels . 263

...............................................Tires . 263...................Checking the Battery . 269

.............................Vehicle Storage . 270

311

Maintenance

Maintenance

235

０７／０５／０９　１１：４５：００　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４０　

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or qualifiedmechanic.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

236

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection,maintenance recommendations,and schedules in this owner’smanual.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４５：１０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４１　

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and push and releasethe select/reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life displayappears (see page ).

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the information displayaccording to this table:

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.

70

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life DisplayM

aintenance

237

ENGINE OIL LIFEDISPLAY

SELECT/RESETKNOB

０７／０５／０９　１１：４５：１９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４２　

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicators remind you that yourvehicle will soon be due forscheduled maintenance.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Maintenance Minder

238

MAINTENANCEMINDERINDICATOR

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE

０７／０５／０９　１１：４５：２５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４３　

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative mileage isdisplayed and begins to blink afterthe vehicle has been driven 10 miles(10 km) or more.

Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

Negative mileage means yourvehicle has passed the maintenancerequired point.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or the tripmeter. Press and release the select/reset knob on the instrument panel.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

240

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

239

NEGATIVE MILEAGE

０７／０５／０９　１１：４５：３５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４４　

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the select/reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperature (ifequipped) every time you press andrelease the select/reset knob.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on thefollowing.

1.

2.243

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

240

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM

０７／０５／０９　１１：４５：４４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４５　

CONTINUED

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the select/reset knob foranother 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

Press the select/reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

4.3.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

241

０７／０５／０９　１１：４５：５２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate light monthly. Seepage .

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:

191

192

250

252

264

254

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

242

０７／０５／０９　１１：４６：０１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４７　

＃

＃

－－

＃

Maintenance Minder

243

Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires

Replace air cleaner element

Replace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission and transfer fluid

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid

:

2

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

NOTE:

1 :

2 : 4WD

242

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

12

3

4

56

1

1

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles,replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailertowing results in higher transmission and transfer fluidtemperatures. This requires transmission and transfer fluidchanges more frequently than recommended by the MaintenanceMinder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,have the transmission and transfer fluid changed every 30,000miles (48,000 km).

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C),in very low temperatures (under 20°F, 29°C), or towing a trailer,replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) /100,000 km (Canada).

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailertowing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid.This requires differential fluid changes more frequently thanrecommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly driveyour vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluidchanged at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

Symbol SymbolM

ain

tenance

Min

der

０７／０５／０９　１１：４６：０８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４８　

Fluid Locations

244

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

POWER STEERING FLUID(Red cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

RADIATOR CAP

０７／０５／０９　１１：４６：１１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２４９　

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the left valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda motor oil in your vehicle.Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

245

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

０７／０５／０９　１１：４６：１９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５０　

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API certification seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

246

DRAIN BOLTWASHER

０７／０５／０９　１１：４６：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５１　

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket is notstuck to the engine block. If it is,remove it before installing a new oilfilter.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of the engine block.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

247

OIL FILTER

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４６：３６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５２　

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to between theMIN and MAX lines. Inspect thecooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-LifeAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 %antifreeze and 50 % water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

248

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４６：４１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５３　

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

2.

1.

67

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

Maintenance

249

RADIATOR CAP

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４６：５３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５４　

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug, thenadd the fluid into the fill hole tobring it to the level between theupper and lower marks on thedipstick.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Automatic Transmission Fluid


250

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０７／０５／０９　１１：４７：０２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５５　

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely. Tighteningtorque:

Check the fluid level with thedifferential at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thedifferential fluid filler bolt andwasher, and carefully feel inside thebolt hole with your finger. The fluidlevel should be up to the edge of thebolt hole. If it is not, slowly addVTM-4 Differential Fluid until itstarts to run out of the hole.

The rear differential should bedrained and refilled with new fluidaccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. Have your dealer replace therear differential fluid.

The transfer assembly should bedrained and refilled with new fluidwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display.

Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 orGL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or80W-90, and have your dealerreplace the transfer assembly fluid.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

6.

4WD models onlyDifferential Oil

Transfer Assembly Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil, Transfer Assembly Fluid

Maintenance

251

FILLER BOLT

CORRECT LEVEL

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Donot mix with other transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４７：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５６　

－－The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoir monthly.Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance minder schedule.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

The timing belt should be replacedaccording to the maintenancemessage shown on the informationdisplay. Replace the belt at 60,000miles (100,000 km) if you regularlydrive your vehicle in one or more ofthese conditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).

In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Frequently tow a trailer.

Timing Belt, Brake Fluid

Brake FluidTiming Belt

252

MIN

MAX

０７／０５／０９　１１：４７：２０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５７　

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Power Steering Fluid

Maintenance

253

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４７：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５８　

Open the hood.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be done by yourdealer or other qualified mechanic.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

254

TAB

BULB CONNECTOR

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４７：３７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２５９　

To remove the front turn signalbulb, push it in slightly and turn itcounterclockwise.

Install the new bulb into thesocket and reinstall it.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove a bulb, pull it straightout of its socket.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn SignalBulb

Replacing a Parking Light/FrontSide Marker Light Bulbs

Maintenance

255

SOCKET

SOCKET

BULB

BULB

０７／０５／０９　１１：４７：４８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６０　

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the left, and turn off the engine.If you are changing the bulb onthe passenger’s side, turn thesteering wheel to the right.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the three holding clipsfrom the inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender.

Remove the socket from the turnsignal assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theturn signal assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the three holding clips.Lock each clip in place by pushingon the center.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

Replacing a Side Turn Signal Bulb

256

SOCKET

BULB

CLIPS

０７／０５／０９　１１：４７：５８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６１　

If equipped

Use a wrench to remove themounting bolt from the underbody.

Pull the under cover away fromthe bumper.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into theassembly and turn it one-quarterturn clockwise to lock it in place.


Reinstall the mounting bolt on theunder cover.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

6.

7.

Lights

Replacing a Fog Light BulbM

aintenance

257

BOLT

BULB

CONNECTOR

０７／０５／０９　１１：４８：０８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６２　

Open the tailgate.

Remove the two screws, then pullthe rear light assembly straightback to remove it from the body.

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the cover. Remove thecovers by carefully prying on theedge with a small flat-tipscrewdriver.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the socket of the burnedout bulb by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise, and pull itstraight out of its socket.

Install a new bulb into the socket,and reinstall the socket into thelight assembly.

1.1.

2.

3.

2.4.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb

258

SCREW

SCREW BULB

SOCKET

BULB

SOCKET

０７／０５／０９　１１：４８：１７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６３　

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw under the lens.

Place a cloth on the middle edgeof a part of the lens on thepassenger’s side. Remove a part ofthe lens by carefully prying on itsedge with a small flip tippedscrewdriver.

Reinstall the back-up light cover.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

Pull the light assembly out of thetailgate.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push a new bulb into thesocket until it bottoms. Reinstallthe assembly.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.


1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

3.

Lights

Replacing the High-mount BrakeLight

Maintenance

259

SCREWS SOCKET

BULB

０７／０５／０９　１１：４８：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６４　

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matsfrom sliding forward, possiblyinterfering with the pedals, orbackwards, making the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

Floor Mats Cleaning Seat Belts

Floor Mats, Cleaning Seat Belts

260

LOOP

０７／０５／０９　１１：４８：３５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６５　

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

1. 2. Front only:

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

261

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４８：４３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６６　

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Lower the wiper arm.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull up firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Front only:

Wiper Blades

262

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE BLADE

０７／０５／０９　１１：４８：４９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６７　

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

211

CONTINUED

Inflation GuidelinesTiresWheels

Wheels, Tires

Maintenance

263

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４８：５８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６８　

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

295

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

264

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

P235/70R16 104S

０７／０５／０９　１１：４９：０９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２６９　

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

298

Tires

Tire Inspection Tire Service Life

TireLabeling

Maintenance

265

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

０７／０５／０９　１１：４９：１９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７０　

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s side wall).Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theanti-lock brake and the vehiclestability assist systems to workinconsistently.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display.Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Tires

Replacing Tires and WheelsTire RotationTire Maintenance

266

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Front Front

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４９：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７１　

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

296

298

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Tires

Maintenance

267

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

P235/70R16 104S

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４９：３５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７２　

＋

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners, on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Tire ChainsWinter Driving

Snow Tires

Tires

268

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４９：４３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７３　

－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

269

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０７／０５／０９　１１：４９：５０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７４　

Fill the fuel tank.

Block the rear wheels.If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if

the vehicle is being storedindoors).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Disconnect the battery.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Vehicle Storage

270

０７／０５／０９　１１：４９：５８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７５　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 272....................Changing a Flat Tire . 273

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 277................................Jump Starting . 278

..............If the Engine Overheats . 280.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 282..........Charging System Indicator . 282

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 283...............Brake System Indicator . 284

......................Emergency Towing . 285..............................................Fuses . 285

..............................Fuse Locations . 289

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

271

０７／０５／０９　１１：５０：０２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７６　

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

After the flat tire is replaced withthe spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. Afterseveral miles (kilometers) drivingwith the spare, the TPMSindicator comes on and the lowtire pressure indicator goes off.

Compact Spare Tire

272

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０７／０５／１０　１７：３９：１５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７７　

CONTINUED

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.If you are towing a trailer, unhitchit.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack and tools.

The tools and jack are behind acover in the cargo area on thedriver’s side. Remove the cover bypushing the top of the cover.

2.

1. 3.

4.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

273

SPARE TIRE

TOOLS

COVER

JACK

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５０：１９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７８　

Put the wheel nut wrench on thehoist shaft. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground. Keepturning the wheel nut wrench tocreate slack in the cable.

Remove the bracket from thespare tire.

The spare tire is storedunderneath the rear cargo area.Remove the plastic cover on thecargo area lining to access theshaft for the spare tire hoist.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

8.

7.

6.

5.

9.


274

BRACKET JACKING POINT

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

The wheel nut wrench supplied withyour vehicle is specially adapted to f itthe hoist shaf t. Do not use any othertool.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５０：２８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２７９　

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap from theflat tire, and place the flat tire upunder the hoist.

Remove the wheel nuts and theflat tire. Temporarily place the flattire on the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

CONTINUED


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

275

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

０７／０５／０９　１１：５０：３８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８０　

Insert the hoist bracket into thecenter hole of the flat tire.

Slowly turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise to take up the slack ofthe hoist cable. Make sure thebracket is seated in the centerhole of the flat tire.

Turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise until the flat tire restsagainst the underbody of thevehicle and you hear the hoistclick.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Refer to(see page ).

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.213


Changing a Tire withTPMS

276

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Always raise the spare tire hoist, evenif you are not stowing a tire. If thehoist is lef t down, it will be damagedduring driving and need to be replaced.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５０：４６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８１　

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Check these things:

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminalconnections (see page ). Youcan then try jump starting thevehicle from a booster battery(see page ).

205

278

285

269

278

CONTINUED

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Starting theEngine

The Starter Operates Normally

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

277

０７／０５／０９　１１：５０：５５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８２　

＋

＋

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified mechanic to find theproblem. Seeon page .

Turn off all electrical accessories:heater, A/C, climate control, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in Park, and set theparking brake.

To jump start your vehicle:1.

2.

3.

64

285

285

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

278

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５１：０５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８３　

－Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

279

０７／０５／０９　１１：５１：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８４　

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.If it climbs to the red mark, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). Add coolant if the level isbelow the MIN mark.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

5.

6.

4.1.

2.

3.

192

285

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

280

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５１：２１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８５　

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine, and set theinterior temperature to maximum.Add coolant to the radiator up tothe base of the filler neck. If youdo not have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

7. 8.

9.11.

10.

285

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

281

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５１：２６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８６　

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

191

245

285

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

282

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５１：３５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８７　

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for more information (seepage ).

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emission controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance,continued operation may causeserious damage.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes may be erased. It takesseveral days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

305

EmissionsTesting

Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

283

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and the engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５１：４２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８８　

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.If the brake system indicator comes

on while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position and as a reminder tocheck the parking brake. It will stayon if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

285

252

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

284

U.S. Canada

０７／０５／０９　１１：５１：４９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２８９　

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.

The vehicle’s fuses are located infour fuse boxes. The interior fuseboxes are located under thedashboard on the driver’s andpassenger’s side.

On 4WD models

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Fuses

Emergency Towing, Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

285

DRIVER’ S SIDE INTERIOR

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of the 4WDsystem. It should be transported on af lat-bed truck or trailer.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５１：５６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９０　

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isthe cause. Replace any blown fuses,and check if the device works.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

To open the passenger’s side fusebox, pull the right edge of the cover.

The primary under-hood fuse box ison the passenger’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

1.

2.

289 290

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

286

PASSENGER’ S SIDE INTERIOR

UNDER-HOODFUSEBOX

０７／０５／０９　１１：５２：０５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９１　

CONTINUED

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Remove the screwswith a Phillips-head screwdriver.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller.

The fuse puller is in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

3. 4. 5.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

287

BLOWN

BLOWNFUSE PULLER

０７／０５／０９　１１：５２：１２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９２　

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If a trailer light is burned out, checkif these fuses are blown when youreplace the light bulbs:

If those fuses are OK, but the trailerlights still do not work, there are twoblown 7.5 amp fuses in the trailerhitch wiring. To access the 7.5 ampfuses:

Open the tailgate and remove thecargo floor lid.Pull out the bottom of the tailgaterubber seal.Remove rear trim panel by pullingup on the inside edge of the reartrim panel, and unhooking the fourclips and tabs.After replacing fuses, and reinstallthe rear trim panel in the reverseorder of removal.

Primary under-hood fuse boxfuses 5, 7, and 24Interior driver’s side fuse box: 10Interior passenger’s side fuse box:10

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the digit code (seepage ).

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window may be disabled.You should reset the AUTO feature,(see page ).

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

95

141


Trailer Fuses

Fuses

288

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０７／０５／０９　１１：５２：２１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９３　

－

－

No. Amps. No. Circuits Protected

No. Circuits Protected

Amps.

Amps.

Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.

CONTINUED

123456789

10111213

20 A30 A20 A15 A15 A

20 A20 A20 A40 A40 A30 A40 A

1415161718192021222324

Rear A/CHeater MotorCooling FanSpare FuseSpare FuseSpare FuseBatteryCondenser FanMG ClutchIGI MainTrailer (accessory)

789

1011

ETCSIG CoilLAFTPMS(FR FOG)

30 A40 A30 A

7.5 A10 A15 A

120 A30 A

7.5 A50 A

15 A15 A15 A7.5 A

(20 A)

Spare FuseSpare FuseRight HeadlightACG SHazardNot usedStop, HornLeft HeadlightRadioPower Window MotorPower SeatRear DefrosterBack Up, ACC

AC INVERTERVSA F/S RelayVSA MotorVTM-4ACMRear Accessory Socket

123456

20 A40 A30 A20 A10 A15 A

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

289

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

０７／０５／０９　１１：５２：３１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９４　

－

－

＊

＊

＊＊

No. No. Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

123

456789

10111213

1234567

8

910111213141516

20 A20 A20 A20 A

10 A20 A

20 A

15 A15 A10 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A20 A

15 A10 A7.5 A

7.5 A10 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A30 A

Fuel PumpSRSHeater Control, A/C ClutchRelay, Cooling Fan RelayPower Mirror, ABSDaytime Running LightECU (PCM), Cruise ControlOPDS, Rear WiperACC RelayBack-up Lights, InstrumentLightsTurn SignalsVTM-4Front WiperNot used

Driver’s Power WindowDriver’s Power Seat RecliningHeated SeatDriver’s Power Seat SlidingNot usedDaytime Running LightDriver’s side Rear PowerWindowFront Passenger’s PowerWindowFront Accessory SocketSmall LightInterior LightPower Door LockBack UpMoonroofMoonroofPassenger’s Side Rear PowerWindow

Canadian models:

Canadian models

Fuse Locations

290

Driver’s Side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side

FrontFront

:

０７／０５／０９　１１：５２：３９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９５　

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 292................................Specifications . 294

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296Uniform Tire Quality

..................................Grading . 296.................................Treadwear . 296

......................................Traction . 296.............................Temperature . 297

.................................Tire Labeling . 298Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) Required.............Federal Explanation . 300

.......................Emissions Controls . 302.....................The Clean Air Act . 302

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 302

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 302

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 302

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 303....................PGM-FI System . 303

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 303

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 303

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 303

....................Replacement Parts . 303..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 304

........................Emissions Testing . 305....Testing of Readiness Codes . 305

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

291

０７／０５／０９　１１：５２：４３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９６　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

292

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０７／０５／０９　１１：５２：４７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９７　

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

293

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０７／０５／０９　１１：５２：５２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９８　

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

＊＊

Specifications

294

Dimensions

Weights

Battery

Capacities

Seating Capacities

1.93 US gal (7.3 )2.43 US gal (9.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )

20.34 US gal (77.0 )188.0 in (4,775 mm)76.5 in (1,943 mm)

LengthWidth

Height

WheelbaseTrack 66.3 in (1,685 mm)

106.3 in (2,700 mm)

70.5 in (1,790 mm)

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)

77.5 in (1,968 mm)

71.7 in (1,821 mm)70.1 in (1,780 mm)71.3 in (1,811 mm)

66.5 in (1,690 mm)66.5 in (1,690 mm)66.7 in (1,694 mm)

12 V 20 AH/5 HRCapacity

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine0.193 US gal (0.73 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

2.79 US qt (2.64 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

Automatictransmissionfluid

Reardifferentialfluid (4WD)Windshieldwasherreservoir

8.3 US qt (7.9 )

3.5 US qt (3.3 )

8.9 US qt (8.4 )

4.0 US qt (3.8 )

Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steeringfluid cooler.The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

TotalFrontRear

8233

Approx.

1 :

2 :

1 :

2 :

FrontRear

4WD

2WD

FrontRear

4WD

2WD

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChange

Total

Change

4WD2WD

4WD2WD

Second rowThird row

1 : LX and LX-VP models 2 : EX, EX-L, and EX-SE models

2 1

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

０７／０５／０９　１１：５３：１１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０２９９　

－－

－－

－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－

＊＊

＊

＊

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

295

Lights

Fuses

Engine

Air Conditioning

Alignment

Tires

Headlights

Front side marker lightsFront position lightsFront turn signal lightsSide turn signal lightsFront fog lightsRear side marker lightsRear turn signal/hazard lightsStop/TaillightsBackup lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightFront map lights

Rear map lightsCargo area lightVanity mirror lightDoor (Courtesy) light

21 W/5 W

5 W12 V

12 V

3 CP21 CP (18 W)8 W4 CP5 W5 W

21 W3 CP55 W3 CP

12 V12 V 1.1 W12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V 21 W/5 W

5 W12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

SKJ16DR-M11IZFR5K-11

10.0 : 1211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,i-VTEC V6 gasoline engine (2WD)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,VTEC V6 gasoline engine (4WD)

12 V12 V

55 W60 W

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

T155/90D16 110MP235/70R16 104S

1°98’ 1°88’0°50’0°50’

0°76’0°66’

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

3.8 W

21 CP (18 W)HFC-134a (R-134a)

24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)ND-OIL8

See page 290 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 290 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.See page 289 or the fuse boxcover.

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

NGK:DENSO:

(2WD)(2WD)(2WD)

(4WD)(4WD)(4WD)

HighLow

(AMBER)

(H11)

(HB3)(H11)

1 : EX-L and EX-SE models2 : LX, LX-VP, and EX models

1

2

０７／０５／０９　１１：５３：４０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３００　

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

296

０７／０５／０９　１１：５３：５０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３０１　

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TechnicalInform

ation

297

０７／０５／０９　１１：５３：５４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３０２　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

P

16

R

235

70

104

S

Tire Size

Tire Labeling

298

(1)

(1)(2)(4)

(3)

Tire SizeTire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

(1)(2)(3)(4)

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

P235/70R16 104S

０７／０５／０９　１１：５４：０５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３０３　

－

－

－

－

－

－The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

Max Load

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Date of manufacture.

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

Max Press

yearweek

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)

Maximum Tire Load

Maximum Tire Pressure

Tire Labeling

TechnicalInform

ation

299

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

０７／０５／０９　１１：５４：１６　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３０４　

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

and/or

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

300

０７／０５／０９　１１：５４：２３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３０５　

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

301

０７／０５／０９　１１：５４：２９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３０６　

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

302

０７／０５／０９　１１：５４：３７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３０７　

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The three way catalytic converter is

in the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

303

０７／０５／０９　１１：５４：４７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３０８　

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

304

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERTHREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTERS

０７／０５／０９　１１：５４：５４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３０９　

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).Make sure the vehicle has been

parked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F. Select a nearby lightly traveled

major highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mphfor at least 20 minutes. Drive onthe highway in D. Do not use thecruise control. When traffic allows,drive for 90 seconds withoutmoving the accelerator pedal.(Vehicle speed may vary slightly;this is okay.) If you cannot do thisfor a continuous 90 secondsbecause of traffic conditions, drivefor at least 30 seconds, then repeatit two more times (for a total of 90seconds).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

305

０７／０５／０９　１１：５５：０３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１０　

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determinesthe readiness codes are still notset, see your dealer.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

8.

9.

Emissions Testing

306

０７／０５／０９　１１：５５：０７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１１　

Customer Service................................Information . 308

....................Warranty Coverages . 309Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 310.....................Authorized Manuals . 311

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

307

０７／０５／０９　１１：５５：１０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１２　

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

292

Customer Service Information

308

American Honda Motor Co.Honda Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7D1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

０７／０８／１０　１４：５０：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１３　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2008 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2008 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty Coverages

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

309

０７／０５／０９　１１：５５：２８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１４　

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

310

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０７／０８／１０　１４：５０：３２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１５　

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Service Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S.only)

Authorized Manuals

Authorized

Manuals

311

Publication

Form Number

61S9V05

61S9V05EL

61S9V30

31S9V650

31S9V810

31S9VM30

31S9VQ50

HON-R

Form Description

2006-2008 Honda Pilot Service Manual

2008 Honda Pilot

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003 Model Series Honda Pilot

Body Repair Manual

2008 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual

2008 Honda Pilot

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2008 Honda Pilot Honda Service History

2008 Honda Pilot Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

www. helminc. com

０７／０５／０９　１１：５５：４０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１６　

312

０７／０５／０９　１１：５５：４３　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１７　

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 196ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 81............Accessory Power Sockets . 101

...........................AC Power Outlet . 102....................Additives, Engine Oil . 245

...............Advanced Airbag System . 30.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 25

..........Airbag System Components . 25..............Air Conditioning System . 106

.....................Rear A/C Control . 113.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 264

......................................Antifreeze . 248...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 216

...............................Indicator . 63, 217...................................Operation . 216

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 141.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 81

................................Audio System . 115...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 23...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 76

.............Automatic Speed Control . 177..............Automatic Transmission . 206

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 294

...............Checking Fluid Level . 250.......................................Shifting . 206

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 206................Shift Lever Positions . 207

....................Shift Lock Release . 209

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 282............................Jump Starting . 278

..............................Maintenance . 269............................Specifications . 294

..............................Before Driving . 187..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 21

...........................Beverage Holders . 99..................................Booster Seats . 54

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 216

.............Break-in, New Linings . 188....................Bulb Replacement . 258

...........................................Fluid . 252.........................................Parking . 97

.................System Indicator . 63, 284........................Wear Indicators . 215

.............................Braking System . 215.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 188

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 76........................Brights, Headlights . 75

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 258

.....................Brake Lights . 258, 259................Front Parking Lights . 255

........Front Side Marker Lights . 255.................................Headlights . 254

........High-mount Brake Lights . 259.................................Rear Bulbs . 258

............................Specifications . 295.............Turn Signal Light . 255, 258

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 254

............................Capacities Chart . 294.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

.............................Carrying Cargo . 198.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

..........................CD Changer . 131, 134.......................................CD Player . 130

Index

A

B

C

IND

EX

I

０７／０５／０９　１１：５５：４８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１８　

........................Certification Label . 292............................................Chains . 268

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 273Change Oil

........................................How to . 246......................................When to . 237

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 282............Checklist, Before Driving . 204

..................Childproof Door Locks . 83Child Seats

.........................................LATCH . 47..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51

...............Climate Control System . 112.........................Clock, Setting the . 142

.....................Code, Audio System . 141........................CO in the Exhaust . 302

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 205......................Compact Spare Tire . 272

...................Console Compartment . 99

.................Consumer Information . 308.............Controls, Instruments and . 59

Coolant........................................Adding . 248

....................................Checking . 192.........................Proper Solution . 248

...................Temperature Gauge . 71

...................Conversation Mirror . 100Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 302............Cruise Control Operation . 177

....Customer Service Information . 308

..............................Economy, Fuel . 193............Emergencies on the Road . 271.............Battery, Jump Starting . 278...........Brake System Indicator . 284

................Changing a Flat Tire . 273.....Charging System Indicator . 282

..................Checking the Fuses . 285.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 282...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 283

..................Overheated Engine . 280...........................Emergency Brake . 97

......................Emergency Flashers . 77......................Emergency Towing . 285.......................Emissions Controls . 302........................Emissions Testing . 305

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 4, 60

................Daytime Running Lights . 76Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 67.................................Dead Battery . 278

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 310................Defogger, Rear Window . 77......Defrosting the Windows . 108, 110

....................................Dimensions . 294...............Dimming the Headlights . 75

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 250

..................................Engine Oil . 191....................Directional Signals . 66, 75

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 215.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 247

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 82..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7...........................................Driving . 203

....................................Economy . 193...................................DVD Player . 144

........DVD Player Error Message . 173

Index

D

E

II

０７／０５／０９　１１：５５：５２　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３１９　

CONTINUED

...................................Fan, Interior . 106.........................................Features . 105

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 189Filters

...............................................Oil . 246.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 77

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 273

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 250

..........................................Brake . 252..........................Power Steering . 253

................Windshield Washers . 249...................Folding the Third Seat . 90

..........................Four-way Flashers . 77.................................................Fuel . 188

...............................Cap Message . 72......................Fill Door and Cap . 189

...........................................Gauge . 70................Octane Requirement . 188

........................Reserve Indicator . 67........................Tank, Filling the . 189

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 285

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 194.........................................Gasoline . 188

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 67...........................................Gauge . 70

................Octane Requirement . 188........................Tank, Filling the . 189

................Gas Station Procedures . 189

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 71

...............................................Fuel . 70GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 221GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

.......................................Rating) . 221............Gearshift Lever Positions . 206

........................................Glove Box . 99GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 221

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 254.................Hazard Warning Button . 77

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 71

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 62, 283

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 282

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 245...............................Overheating . 280

............................Specifications . 295

............................Speed Limiter . 208.......................................Starting . 205

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 302...............................Exhaust Fumes . 57

Exhaust Gas Recirculation........................................System . 303

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 19

Index

FG

H

IND

EX

III

０７／０５／０９　１１：５５：５８　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２０　

..................................................Keys . 79

........................................Headlights . 75........................................Aiming . 254

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 76............Daytime Running Lights . 76

..................High Beam Indicator . 67...........High Beams, Turning on . 75............Low Beams, Turning on . 75

.........................Reminder Chime . 76........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 254

...................................Turning on . 75...................................Headphones . 174

..............................Head Restraints . 91.................................Heated Mirror . 94

.....................................Heater, Seat . 86.....................Heating and Cooling . 106

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 205.................High-Low Beam Switch . 75..............High-mount Brake Light . 259

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 183

.......................Hood, Opening the . 190

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 292

Ignition..............................................Keys . 79

...........................................Switch . 81............Timing Control System . 303

........................Immobilizer System . 80...Important Handling Information . iv

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61

...............................Infant Restraint . 43......................................Infant Seats . 43

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 263...................................Inside Mirror . 92

.............................Inspection, Tire . 265Installing a Child Seat

.........................................LATCH . 47..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51

............................Instrument Panel . 61........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76

........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 274.......................................Jack, Tire . 273

................................Jump Starting . 278

.......................Label, Certification . 292.................Lane Change, Signaling . 75

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 22...........LATCH Anchorage System . 47

.......................................Lights . 75, 102....................Bulb Replacement . 254

.......................................Indicator . 61.........................................Parking . 75

..................................Turn Signal . 75....................................Load Limits . 199

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 81Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 81............................Fuel Fill Door . 189

....................................Glove Box . 99....................Lockout Prevention . 82

.................................Power Door . 82........................Low Coolant Level . 192.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 67

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 282

Index

I

J

K

L

IV

０７／０５／０９　１１：５６：０４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２１　

CONTINUED

.................................Lower Anchor . 47...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 294

.........................................Luggage . 198

..................................Maintenance . 235Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 242................................Minder . 237-243

.........................Minder Indicator . 69..........................................Safety . 236

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 283..............Manual Seat Adjustments . 88

...............................Meters, Gauges . 70.................................Modifications . 197

.........................................Moonroof . 96

...................Neutral Gear Position . 207..................New Vehicle Break-in . 188

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 292

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 188.........................................Odometer . 70

...............................Odometer, Trip . 70....................Off-Highway Driving . 230...................Off-Road Precautions . 230

Oil........................Change, How to . 246......................Change, When to . 237......................Checking Engine . 191..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 282

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 245

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 81Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 302..............................Outside Mirrors . 93

....................Overheating, Engine . 280....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 242

..............Panel Brightness Control . 76........................Park Gear Position . 207

...........................................Parking . 214

.................................Parking Brake . 97Parking Brake and Brake System

...............................Indicator . 63, 284.................................Parking Lights . 75

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 304..........................Playing the Radio . 117

................................Playing a Disc . 130....Playing the Disc Changer . 131, 134

.............................PGM-FI System . 303................Power Seat Adjustments . 87.................Power Socket Locations . 98

..............................Power Windows . 94.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12

...Additional Safety Precautions . 20.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19

........................Protecting Children . 38...........................Protecting Infants . 43

...........Protecting Larger Children . 53.............Protecting Small Children . 44

Index

IND

EX

P

M

N

O

V

０７／０５／０９　１１：５６：１０　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２２　

......................................Safety Belts . 10............Safety Defects, Reporting . 310

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.............Safety Labels, Location of . 58

..............................Safety Messages . iii.........................................Seat Belts . 10

...............Additional Information . 21Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 23.....................................Cleaning . 260

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22................................Maintenance . 23

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 21, 62

...................System Components . 25...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15....................................Seat Heaters . 86

.................................................Seats . 87............Folding the Second Seat . 89

...............Folding the Third Seat . 90..........................Head Restraints . 91

.........Reclining the Second Seat . 89............Reclining the Third Seat . 90

.......................Third Seat Access . 90...................Seats, Adjusting the . 87-91

............................Security System . 176...............................Serial Number . 292

...........................Service Intervals . 237.............................Service Manual . 311

.........Service Station Procedures . 189..........................Setting the Clock . 142

Shifting the Automatic.............................Transmission . 206

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 206........................Shift Lock Release . 209

Side Marker Lights, Bulb.........................Replacement in . 255

..............................Side Airbags . 11, 31..........................Off Indicator . 34, 63

...................Radiator Overheating . 280.............Radio/CD Sound System . 115

...........................Readiness Codes . 305...............................Rear A/C Unit . 113

............Rear Audio Control Panel . 149........Rear Entertainment System . 144

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 258.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 182

............................Rear View Mirror . 92.................Rear Window Defogger . 77

.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 74..........Reclining the Seat Backs . 87-91

.............................Reminder Lights . 61................Remote Audio Controls . 140.................Remote Control (RES) . 171

.......................Remote Transmitter . 83Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 246.................................Floor Mats . 260

..........................................Fuses . 285................................Light Bulbs . 254

........................................Minder . 243................................Timing Belt . 252

...........................................Tires . 265

.............................Wiper Blades . 261Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 23...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 192

...............................Restraint, Child . 38..................Reverse Gear Position . 207

................................Rotation, Tire . 266

Index

R

S

VI

０７／０５／０９　１１：５６：１４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２３　

CONTINUED

...............................Signaling Turns . 75.....................................Snow Tires . 268

................................Sound System . 115Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 272............................Specifications . 295

....................Specifications Charts . 294................................Speed Control . 177

..........SRS, Additional Information . 25...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

.............................Airbag Service . 36How the Side Airbag Off

........................Indicator Work . 34..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 28

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 31........................SRS Components . 25

.............................SRS Indicator . 33, 63....START (Ignition Key Position) . 81

.......................Starting the Engine . 205In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 205................With a Dead Battery . 278

........Steam Coming from Engine . 280

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 78

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 81...............................Buttons . 140, 177

...................Stereo Sound System . 115....................Storing Your Vehicle . 270

........................Sunglasses Holder . 100........................................Sun Visor . 101

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 36

.........................SRS Indicator . 33, 63...................System Components . 25

..................................Synthetic Oil . 246

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 258.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 271

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296.....Emissions Control Systems . 302

....................Emissions Testing . 305Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 304.......................Temperature Gauge . 71

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 114

....................Temperature, Outside . 71...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 23

........Testing of Readiness Codes . 305..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51

............................Theft Protection . 141..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 304

..........................Time, Setting the . 142..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 78

....................................Timing Belt . 252

....................................Tire Chains . 268.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 273

Tire Pressure Monitoring................System (TPMS) . 211, 300

Index

IND

EX

T

VII

０７／０５／０９　１１：５６：１９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２４　

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 271

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 296........................Unleaded Gasoline . 188

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 247

................................Vanity Mirror . 101.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 199

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 294....Vehicle Identification Number . 292

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 218

.........................VSA Off Switch . 219.............................Vehicle Storage . 270

.................................................VIN . 292..................................Viscosity, Oil . 245..................................VTM-4 Lock . 210

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 58

....................Warranty Coverages . 309Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 249............................Level Indicator . 67

.....................................Operation . 74Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 78............Alignment and Balance . 266

..........................Compact Spare . 272...............................Nut Wrench . 275

Windows..................Operating the Power . 94

...........................Rear, Defogger . 77Windshield

...........................Defroster . 108, 110.......................................Washers . 74

Wipers, Windshield.......................Changing Blades . 261

.....................................Operation . 74Rear Window Wiper and

.....................................Washer . 74..................Wireless Headphones . 174

...............................................Tires . 263..............................Air Pressure . 264

.........................Checking Wear . 265..........................Compact Spare . 272

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296......................................Inflation . 263

..................................Inspection . 265..............................Maintenance . 266

...................................Replacing . 266......................................Rotating . 266

................................Service Life . 265...........................................Snow . 268

............................Specifications . 295...................Tools, Tire Changing . 273

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 220

................Emergency Wrecker . 285....Equipment and Accessories . 227

.......................Traction Devices . 268..................Trailer Driving Tips . 227

.............................Weight Limit . 223Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 250...........................Fluid Selection . 250

..............Identification Number . 292.............Shifting the Automatic . 206

.....................................Treadwear . 296

.......................................Trip Meter . 70....................................Turn Signals . 75

Index

U

V

W

VIII

０７／０５／０９　１１：５６：２４　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２５　

....................................Worn Tires . 265.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 285

Index

IND

EX

IX

０７／０５／０９　１１：５６：２７　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２６　

０７／０５／０９　１１：５６：２９　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２７　

０７／０５／０９　１１：５６：３１　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２８　

4WD models only

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Automatic Transmission Fluid:Rear Differential Fluid:

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Compact Spare Tire:

Front/Rear:

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) (see page

).

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid(see page ).

245

251

253

252

251

20.34 US gal (77.0 )

０７／０５／０９　１１：５６：４５　３１Ｓ９Ｖ６５０　０３２９　

owner’s manual (unlinked) - honda · 2008 pilot owner’s manual (unlinked) this document does...

Documents